Video Editing With iMovie: Create Professional Videos With iMovie

1. You CAN Edit Professionally With iMovie: Eye movie. It's built into your math. It's free, and it's powerful enough to create professional videos without having to spend forever learning complicated softwares. My name is Adam Taylor, and Mastering video editing is how I started delivering services to my clients, the same clients that took me from a broke college student to a six bigger business owner. With Eye Movie, you can do basically everything that you need without needing to buy or learn any complicated new softwares. And in this course, I'm going to show you exactly how to do it too. Let me show you. We'll start with the foundations, how to import footage, use the interface efficiently and do basic edits. Once we've got the basics down, we'll step it up with transitions overlays, and other effects. And not just the ones built and I movie, but I'll show you advanced techniques like light leaks, cloud passes, and infinite overlays to create videos that no one could imagine were made with the free software. We'll get into how to spruce up footage by optimizing audio, stabilizing video, and many other tricks. We'll also cover titles in graphic. Show you how to create advanced titles with other free softwares and add animated graphics using tools like Flat icon and Jitter. Finally, we'll put all of it together by creating actual projects that use all of the things that we've learned. We'll cover all of this and so much more. After teaching thousands of students and creating content for businesses, I can confidently say, A, this is one of the easiest ways to start editing content at a professional level. And, B, this is the most complete eye movie course that you'll find on Skillshare. You'll get over 10 hours of polished, easy to follow lessons, downloadable templates, and resource links for free footage, graphics, and music. And best of all, me and my team are in the Q&A section 247 to help you out with whatever you need. We live in a time where it's crucial to master content creation. With Imovie, you can create elite content without any headaches. It's time for you to level up your video skills. So take action and join the course right now. 2. Import Footage from iPhone: Before we can get started into actually editing a project of ours, we first have to make sure the media is available to us. And what's the media? Well, the media is all the footage, assets and audio that we're going to be using in creating our project. So when we open Eye Movie, this is the first screen that we are going to see. And to go to upload all of our footage, we have to go to the Media tab. So we can access this Media tab in three ways. Most obviously and simply is to just click Media right here. But there are another two ways that we can do this. We can either click one on our keyboard or we can come up here, go to the Window tab and then click Go to Media. So now we are here on the Media tab, and there's a lot to look at here, but we're just going to start simple and importing some footage from an iPhone. So what we can do to start importing our footage is to click Import Media right here. So to start out, what I'm going to do is just plug my phone into my computer. Now that my phone is plugged in, I can click Import Media. So as you can see, we have a loading bar. And right now it's about two thirds of the way done. But as I click here, we're able to see all this information, which is all the photos and videos from my iPhone. So I'm going to just let this finish up and loading. Then I'll tell you a few things that we can do with all of this. So right now, what we see is a whole jumble of stuff which we really can't discern very much from. So to fix this, what we want to do is come here to this gear icon in the top right and we can adjust the clip size. So right now, it's set to be as small as possible. So if we drag this all the way to the right, we're making it as big as possible, and now we can actually see the media very clearly, so we can pull what we want into our library. So now let's say that I want to create a movie with just videos from my iPhone. Now it's showing me all clips, as we can see up here. It's showing me both photos and videos, and I don't want that. I want to see just the videos. So what I can do is click this right here and I can filter it between photos and videos. And like I said, I want to do videos. So I'm just going to select that. And as we can see, it's now filtered to be such. Now we see that these videos, this media is being presented to me in a certain way. How can we figure out what way this is? Well, if we come up here, we can click View. And right now, the sort clips are being sorted by date and descending order. So this basically means it's showing me the most recent things that were taken on my iPhone. Say I want to change this, and I want to have all of these clips to be sorted by their name. So what I can do is click name right here, and it's in descending order. So that means it's starting at the top and going down. And after clicking that, we see that nothing's changed, and that's because nothing in my camera roll has actually been named. Right now, they're all their original file names, which is going to be something like a couple letters with a few numbers attached to it. So if I want to actually have this change to something that's going to be a little more meaningful, then I can have it set by duration. So now I get to see the longest videos in my camera role. And now if I want to change that, I can then come back up here to view and then sort clips by ascending order. So this is basically going to be showing me the shortest videos in my camera. Okay, so now I'm back here at the Basic view, which again is going to be the clips are going to be sorted by date and descending order. So we're here at the Basic view, and we can still do a few things in this. So if I hover over any one of these videos, then I can basically hear what is being said in each video. Putting a Sabin. And if you're trying to do this and it's not working on your end, then what you can do is come up here, go to view, and then scroll down here to audio skimming. Or by other means, you can click Shift and S, and you can enable audio skimming. So you're basically able to hear what's going on in each one of your videos. Now, that's not the only way that we can view audio from these clips. Another way that we can basically visualize this data is coming back up here to the gear, so the same place that we change the clip size, and we can check this box, which is show waveforms. So this is basically going to be showing us the volume and the audio in each one of these clips. So as you can see in this first video right here, we can see in the beginning, it starts out relatively loud, and then there's not much going on. As you progress through it, and then towards the end of the video, there is a lot of audio. There's a lot of volume in this clip. So that's essentially how you should be reading these waveforms. Basically, the height of these waves indicates how loud it is. And I movie also gives us some extra information in this. So if we could see right here at this wave, we see that it's a little bit yellow at the top. And this is basically eye movie telling us that the audio on this clip has exceeded a certain threshold that is now going to be extremely loud. So in a later lesson, I'll show you how we can deal with this audio. So if it's too loud or it's not clear, we're able to fix this. Now, the last thing to note in this window is the Import two. So the Import two is basically, which event is this footage going to be uploaded into? Now, when you open Eye Movie for the first time, it is always going to have an import to your current date. Your current date is basically the first event that I Movie creates for you. So say I want to select these three clips to import into this event. What I'm able to do is either click each one and hold Command and click the rest, as I just did, or I can click the first one and then hold Shift and click the last one. And it selects everything in between those two clips. Let me show you how to do that again if it wasn't super clear. So I'm going to go ahead and turn off audio skimming right now in case you guys can't hear me over this. But I'm going to select this first one. And if I want to select everything up until this bottom right media, then what I'm able to do is hold Shift and then click this. So as you can see, everything here has now been selected. But I don't want that. I just want these three clips right here. So I'm going to click this one, hold Command, and then click the rest, so I can select just these three. And I can import it in the one that I movie created for me, or I could create a new event. But for now, I'm just going to go ahead and import it into this event. Alright, so as you can see, right now, it's being imported, and we get to see the progress of each import by this little circle right here. And we can also see it in the top right here. As I said that, and vanished, but you can see that is where all the progress is going to be stored. Now, as you can see, that big Import button is now gone. So if we want to go back to import some more, we can do two things. First, we can select this down arrow right here, which is basically the import button, or we can select I on our keyboard. Right now, I'm just going to click this button, so it's visualized better for you. So now we're back here. And as you can see, the three videos that I imported are now gone from here. Why is that? It's because I have this button checked. So I have the hide imported. So this is essentially a setting, so you don't import the same things multiple times. So if I turn this off, now you can see those three videos that I imported are now here. So I'm going to go ahead and re select Hide Imported and I'm going to select these three clips to now Import. I can click this one. I'm going to hold Shift, and now I can click this one. It selected all three, and I can click Import Selected. So as you just saw, those ones uploaded super fast. It took honestly less than 2 seconds to actually upload and get into this event. Again, all of this was imported from my iPhone. All I had to do was take a USBC cable and plug that into my computer and plug directly into my phone. And this was able to be accessed right here in this import window under Adam's iPhone. And what I'm able to do if I want to disconnect it, I can either unplug it from here or I can click this button right here, which will then disconnect it and eject it. Now, say you accidentally disconnected your phone, all you have to do is unplug it and then re plug it in and then wait a few seconds. And as you can see, it's right back here under Adam's iPhone, and it will just take, again, a few seconds to load, and then we can access everything. Alright, so there you have it. That's our first lesson in importing footage. If you're importing from your iPhone, as you saw, it's super easy and super doable to do. And the next lesson, we're going to go through how to import footage directly from a camera or an SD card. 3. Import Footage from SD Card & Camera: Now, what if we want to import footage into I Movie from our SD card or from a camera? Well, we have to yet again, come back to this media page. And if you're opening I Movie and you are on the projects page, then remember, all you have to do is click Media up here or you can come to the Window view, click Go to Media. Or alternatively, you can click O on your keyboard, and it'll bring you here. So say that you have an SD card, and you want to import the footage from your SD card right into EMVe. Well, all we have to do is take this SD card and plug it directly into your computer as I'm doing right now. Well, as we plug this in, if we wait a few seconds, there we go. We can see that it immediately popped up in iMovie and gave us the option to import. We see right here that my SD card named Elise is right here, and we have three files in this SD card. So again, depending on how much photos or footage you have on your SD card, what you're able to do is come up here to this gear icon and you can adjust the clip size. So if you're going to be having a lot and you want to skim through very fast, you can make the clip size extremely small. If it's only a few and you really want to focus in on the specific clips, you can then make the clip size large. And the other option we have here is an audio. So we can show wave forms either enable it or disable it. And waveforms, again, are basically the audio that is associated with each clip. Right now, the waveforms are not of interest to me, so I'm going to unselect it. And as you can see, these are all quite long clips. So what I'm able to do is I can click them. I can select Import. And as you can see, right now, it is going to be loading in. So I have this load bar that basically shows me the progress. And the same visualization is made right here. And since this one was a 30 minute clip, it's going to take a little bit to actually upload. Okay, so now we can see that the loading has finished. We don't see a loading bubble right here. So we know that this has now been imported. So it's a 30 minute clip. There's a lot of content within that. So how can we kind of expand this to see a little bit more of what's going on? To do that, what we're able to do is come here to this little settings icon. And then as we are before, we're able to adjust the clip size. But additionally, what we're able to do is adjust the Zoom. So right now it is zoomed basically all the way out. So it is showing me a basic standard landscape view of this clip right now. This is basically as zoomed out as it can get. If I were to zoom it in one notch, it shows me this basic standard view in 30 minute increments. And as you can see, our clip hasn't changed any size because the clip itself is 30 minutes. So again, if I were to put it up a notch, it is now in ten minute increments. So because it is a 30 minute clip, we now see it triple in its size. So if I were to up the notch again to put it in five minute increments, we get to see much more content from this. Now, in a later lesson, I'll show you how we can take specific parts of these clips and rate them is what it's called eye movie. So if we want to select specific bits from this, then what we can do is rate them, favorite them, and then pull them into our projects, basically helping to organize these clips. But as I said, we'll go over that later. Now what I want to show you is how we can import footage from a camera. So to do that, we're going to go back to our import window. Again, this is right here at the top left this import butt. Oh, we're going to click the Import button. Now instead of being in our SD card right here, which is named Elise, we're going to go over to our Canon EOS 250 D, which is my camera that is plugged into my computer. So as we can see here, we see five pieces of media. But if we go back to the SD card that I had, we can see that it is a little different because here in the SD card, we're able to see the timestamp, so basically how long each of these clips are 8.4 minutes right here and 29.9 minutes here. And we're able to scroll through and see what's going on at each part. And this one in the camera view, we're not able to see any of that. We're only able to see basically a preview clip from each of these video files. Now, just as before, if I wanted to filter what was on my camera to say just photos, I can do that up here. Right now it's selected to just videos. And if I were to click all clips, we see nothing's changed, and that's because in this camera in the SD card that's in the camera, I only have videos. But if I were to select photos, you can see that nothing is there. So we're not able to see the length of this media, and we're not able to scrub through and see the content of it, either, but it is able to sort by videos and pictures. So if your camera has an SD card and you have an SD card reader, then I do recommend taking the SD card and plugging that into your computer, so you're able to see more details regarding your footage. So essentially, when it comes down to it, using an SD card when you can is always going to be better than using a camera. So there you have it. That's how you can import your footage from an SAD card and a camera. Now in the next lesson, I'm going to show you how you can pull footage directly from your computer's documents. 4. Import Footage from Finder: Now I'm going to be showing you the final way that we can import footage, and this is going to be the way that I am going to be importing most of the footage that we're going to be using in this course. This is going to be uploading footage directly from my Max finder. So we're here I movie from where we left off in the last lesson. So to upload from our Finder, it's going to be the same steps that we took before. So that's going to be going up here into the Upload button at the top left of your screen. Now, here are all the places that we can choose to upload from. And the prior lessons I showed you how we can upload from a camera right here that's plugged into my computer right now. But now to go from our Finder, we have to select devices. Or you can come in the favorites right here. These are going to be Auto selected. So for me, it's the desktop and the user of this computer. Those are the two favorites, and I'm also going to show you how we can add a new favorite. So to go and access our finder, go to devices, right here, this is for me, my hard drive, my McIntosh. So I'm going to go down here into users into this user and I'm going to scroll down, and I made a folder specifically for this course. The folder is located right here under desktop, and if I scroll down, I'm going to find it, and then I'll come back to you. Okay, so here's the folder that I'm going to be importing the footage from. I just named it ImvieMedia, and right here, we have a few pieces of footage from this project that we're going to create together. Now, you're going to be able to find the footage that I'm going to be working with in the resources, so you can follow along and do this. Now, since it took me a second to find it because I have a lot of files on my computer, I'm going to make this much easier for myself to access this folder within Eye Movie. And the way I do that is to make it a favorite. Now, to make it a favorite, all I have to do is grab the folder and then drag it up here and drag it over the favorites and then release. And now that is its own favorite right here, so I can always access it. But although I've made it a favorite, none of this media that I have here is actually within E Movie yet. I still have to import it. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to select all of these. And right now, you saw all of them being selected. Again, how I was able to do that is I clicked the first one, and then I shift down, and then I clicked the last one. Again, if I want to select individually and I don't want to select all of them, I can just hold command and then select the ones that I want. Like this. But since I want all of them, I'm just going to click the first one, hold Shift, and click the last one, so they're all selected. Now, if I import it, it's going to import into the event that was created when I opened I movie, which was today's date. But I don't want that to be the case, because I want all of this to go into a new event, so I have everything that we're going to be working on within this course in one event. So if you're still a little confused about what an event is, I'll go over that more detail in the next lesson. But for now, what I'm going to do is select this and I'm going to select new event, so it goes into a new event, and I'm going to name this I movie Master Class. I'm going to select Okay. Now it's created, so I can just go ahead and click Import A. Okay, so now we're here, and I have all of the footage that I uploaded right here in I Movie. So we can go through look at them. This is just Manhattan at night. This is a street view of Manhattan. We have Times Square during the day, video of a subway here and more just random videos about New York. But as you can see, it's all gone to its own library under Eye movie Master Class. If I select this one, we can see this is what we worked with in the prior two lessons. But I can just select this, and now I have everything in an organized spot. But right now, I have this event, eye movie Master Class among two other events that are not going to be relevant to me in this course. So I want to change that and make it a little bit more organized. But that's what we're going to go over in the next lesson. 5. Navigate the iMovie Interface: It's time to actually create our first project and discuss the interface and everything that we can do with an eye movie. So to do this, we have to be in the Projects tab. Before we were in the media tab uploading everything that we were going to be working with. So if you're here, we have to come up here and select projects, or you can click number two on your keyboard to bring you here. Okay, so now we're going to click Create New and select movie. So trailer is going to be basically a templated kind of way that you can go about creating a movie or creating a project with an eye movie. Now, we're going to go over trailers and all the different ones that are available to us and the ways we can use them. But for now, we're going to go ahead and create a movie. So now we're here in our project. We're here in our movie. Um, and the format here, the layout, isn't something that's going to be too foreign to you if you were following along in the previous lessons because this media section right here is essentially the exact same thing we were just working in, but now it's just a little bit smaller. So we can go ahead and select here our eye movie master class, and we can go to our New York trip with all the footage that we're going to be. So what are we looking at? Right now, this section here is relatively familiar because this is the media section we were working with, but there are a lot of new things here. So just as before, we see if we're going to be scrolling over clips, we can get a quick preview of them right here in this window. And just as before, if we want to select certain ranges of these clips, then what we're able to do, we can hold R and then drag and select any part of it that we want. And we can rate them with these two buttons right here, or we can use our keyboard to rate them. For example, we can click F to rate it as favorite, or we can click to unrate it and take off any label that we put onto it. So, in any clip, at any given moment, we're able to select it to view, and we can click Play right here, and it will play for us in real time. So we can see this kind of playhead right here that's moving, and it's showing us where in the clip are we seeing it in the preview. And it automatically went on to the next clip. So we can see it right here. It's going and it's almost done, and now it's finished now onto the next clip. So you see how that works there. Now, if we want to review all of our footage and we want to see it in a bigger window, we can click this full screen, and it'll show us in a full screen manner. So here, we're able to go and scrub through it. We can use these buttons to navigate to our different clips that we have in our event, and we can click the minimize button to go back to our project. So, now, looking above here, we are right now in the media section. So if we want to go ahead and click these other ones, we can see that we have a variety of options for us. So right here, we have the audio and video section. Here, next to it, there's titles. Next to that, backgrounds, and then finally, we have transitions. So as you can see, there's a lot going on in each of these sections, which is why we're going to have lessons that are going to be fully dedicated to each of these and the way that it can beef up and improve our movies. So now let's just go ahead and go back to the media section. Oh, when working with our media, we're not only able to watch it in this preview window, but we're also able to edit it. So right here at the top of this, we have different options to edit. So just like here in this section, we are going to be going over in depth and lessons that are dedicated to each one of these and to how we can use these to our benefit in editing eye movie. So hovering over them, we get to see the labels for each. So this first one here is color balance. Next one, color correction. Next one, cropping. Then we have this one, which is video stabilization. Volume, noise reduction. This one is going to be adjusting the speed of the clip. So if something is going too fast, you can speed it down. And then if it's going too slow, you can also speed it up. So, this one is also filters that we have. So this is going to be both visual filters to put on top of our footage, and then also audio filters. And then here is going to be clip information. So this is basically going to tell us a load of things. So first, it'll tell us when was it actually created. So, as you can see, this one was downloaded February 21, 2025, and the name of the file is Time Square. And then it also has a duration, and we could share if we want to. So now I've gone over this top part, but you might be wondering, what is this huge gray rectangle. This is what's called our timeline. So this is going to be where all of our editing is actually going to be done. So let me show you real quickly. I can hear, let's grab this piece of footage. I'm clicking it and it's selecting the entire piece, and I can drag it down and place it on my timeline. So now that this is placed on my timeline, just as before and reviewing it right here, if I hover my mouse over this, you can see that I'm previewing each specific part right here in this preview window. Now, the same thing is going to be done here within the timeline. I can just hover over it and I can see what exact frame I am based on this preview footage. Also, what I'm able to do in this part is, if I click space, we get to see this is running in real time, and we get to see how this looks in real time on this top right square. So I'm able to click to different parts in this, and I can click Play, and it plays to wherever part I click. See, I click there, and now I can click here towards the end, and it's going to be playing from there. Now I'm going to click the space bar again to pause it. And I can do this exact same thing right here with this play button. So as you can see, it's moving from here and I can click pause. This button right here is going to be a voiceover. So this is also going to be something that we'll be going over in the next lesson. Now, just as before, in the media section, we're able to organize these clips even further in terms of how they look in our space right here. So I can make the clip size either bigger or smaller right here, because these are eight pieces of media. I'm going to put it at this size because I can see everything here and it's just more manageable for me to deal with. So just as before, what I can do is I can zoom these clips. So I can zoom them to where this standard size right here, the standard rectangle. It will be the size of this duration right here. So right now, all of these clips are within 10 minutes, so we don't see them changing at all. Now, if I increase this more and more, eventually, as we just saw there, we saw some movement. So right now, it's zoomed into 1 minute increments. So what that means is if I hover over this, it's a very not very bright clip, but you can see that in this top left area right here, this is moving. This footage is moving within this clip. The rest of it, although it's the same thing, it's the same piece of footage, we see that only this first third is moving because that is where I'm hovering over. And if I do the same thing over here, I hover over this middle part. Now this is moving, and the rest is. We see how it's broken up into these three parts because right now it's zoomed in to 1 minute increments. And if we come back to here, we can see that this clip is 3 minutes long. So I can do the same thing in increasing this. And if I were to increase it, say, all the way to now each of these thumbnails are going to be half a second long, we first off, we don't see much movement going on if we look in this preview window right here to the right when I'm hovering over these clips because this is essentially putting it in slow motion when I'm looking over this. And this can be useful to you if you're looking for a very specific part in your clip. Now it's zoomed in all the way to half second increments. If I were to scroll through this, you could see that what was now previously just filling up this kind of rectangle right here, it is now ranging across this entire area. So yet again, if you're going to be zooming in this much into your footage, this is really just because you want to find a very specific part of your clip. For me, I don't need that right now, so I'm going to zoom out all the way. So now I can see all of my footage in just this area and I don't have to scroll through a behemoth of footage. So, this interface layout that we're looking at doesn't have to be just as we see it. If we want to adjust it a little bit, we have the freedom to do so. So right here, I can grab the top of this gray rectangle, and I'm able to drag it down to then resize it. So you see, as I drag it down, the rest of the media kind of adjusts to fit this. Most notably, we see this preview window here. Get much bigger to fill the space. And once I get to this point, we see that it's not going to infringe on this left tile anymore, and now it just goes lower. So for me in this course, because I want you guys to see very clearly what I'm going to be doing in these up here in these rectangles, I'm going to have this pull down a little bit more than the standard wood. So, and we can also adjust this from here as well. So we see this side panel right here that has all of our media. So what we're able to do is we can grab this little black bar that divides this area from the media. And what we can do is drag it. We can either make it, you know, bigger like this or we can make it a little thinner. Since this one since this preview window is as big as it is, there's not that much, you know, leeway here. But now that I've made it smaller, you know, I can make this bigger or not. Now, if you're going to be working in just one event like I am right now, all of my stuff is in this New York trip event, then I don't need to see all of this. So in order to close this, all I have to do is click this little icon right here, right next to the name of the event. So I just click that, and now that entire side window collapses. So now that I have that collapse, I'm now just going to drag this back down to fit a little better. Now, say we want to collapse this entire window. So we don't want to see the media. All we want to see is our timeline down here and the preview. We have to do to do that is come up here. Right next to the Upload button, we're going to come and click this. So now we hid that entire section. So now it's a much more clean view. So basically, all that did was then close that media bar, and the preview window is now enlarged, and we still have all the options we had before, but it's now just a little bit more clean. So now we saw this entire interface here in the project view. So what I can do is exit this project, which I'm going to do, and now I get the option to name this project. I'm going to name it New York trip. Now I'm going to click Okay. And as you can see, we now come back to our original view. So this is where we open Eye Movie, and we get to see it named right here. So I can then come back, click here. Come to the media section and I can upload more footage. Just as you saw before, we have the same options in editing this footage. So we have all of these, as I said, we're going to go into further detail later in the course. And then we can just come back, click here in projects. And now that this project has been created, I have a few options if I click these three dots. So I can either play the movie. So basically, right now, I pulled only one of those clips into this project. So if I click Play Movie, as I will now, it will play me from the start of this. Now, let's back up. Let's go back to the projects. I'm going to click these three lines. And now, if I want to rename the project, say, I want to take off this number one here, I can do so. I click Rename Project, deleted that. I can come back and click these three dots and click Rename Project. Now if I wanted to change the name of this, then I could. Now, lastly, we have this option here in terms of filtering our projects. This one isn't going to be pertinent to us right now because we just started our first project. But if we wanted to, we have all these filters that we could apply. So if we had a bunch of projects that we've been working on, then we can filter them with the five most recent, 20 most recent, if they were modified in the last six months or last year. But there you have it. There's an overview of I Movies interface and how you could adjust it and customize it to your liking. 6. Setting Up Your Project the Right Way: Now, before we actually start working in the timeline and working with our clips, one last thing that there is to mention is our settings. These are our project settings. So let me first drag in a clip here. I can select the whole clip and drag it in. So now here from our project settings, we're able to do a couple of things. The first one is going to be one that you're familiar with now that's going to be very similar, the same thing to us changing the size of clips in our media. So that's what we can do here in our project as well. We can make this extremely big. We can make them very small, but we are able to do a few things here that's more than just changing the clip size. So the first one that I want to bring your attention to is the theme. So let's click on theme. So these themes, I want to show you them now as a preliminary thing. So, these themes basically are similar to trailers and that they give us templates to work with. So they basically put this kind of overview on our movie, and we're able to work with them to kind of give us a good starting point if this is something that you like. We're going to go deeper into themes later in this course, but I want to let you know that there are here, and they're very easily accessible for us. So I'm going to go ahead and exit out of this. And then going back into the settings, we also have filters. Yet, again, these are going to be something that we will be working with more in depth later in the course. But for example, let's just select one random one here. And we can see that this filter has been applied to our entire project. So let's go ahead and remove this filter. Now, I'm going to go and show you there are three options here. One of them we're going to ignore for now and we're going to come back to later. Now, the two that we have here are fade in from black and fade out from black. So what does this mean? So, right now, we're looking at our clip, and we have both things selected, but we don't see anything change. So if we now click here at the end and click space, we see that this now fades out from black. And if we look at the beginning, we have this same fade from black. So from the beginning and end, and let me show you, if I add this clip right here into the timeline, then we see that the fade from black no longer is here at the end of this clip. Instead now, it is here at the end. So these are two little settings that you can choose. And the clip size is going to be what I'm going to be working with mostly throughout this course. And then lastly, what we have here is the audio, which is basically giving us a visualization of the audio in each of the clips. So if I were to check this out, then we'll see all the audio that is going to be associated with these clips, we can no longer see in our timeline anymore. So I'm going to go ahead and check this on because that's something that I do like to have visualized. 7. Manage Your Library and Events: Alright, so as you can see here, I have one library, and this library consists of three events. So the way that you can think of libraries is basically just folders. These folders are going to contain all the assets, media, footage that you are going to put in them. So you can think of a library as a book. And then the events are the chapters within that book. So right now I have this eye movie master class, basically the footage that we are going to be using right now in this course as a single event, but I don't want that to be the case. I want to have eye movie master class as its own library, and then the specific projects that we work on within this course as their own events. So the first step in doing this is I have to create a new library. Now, I could just rename this library, but I want to show you the process of creating a new library. So to do so, you have to come up here into File. So select File, and then you can come down and you see open Library. Right now, we're not going to be opening a library because we haven't created the one that we need to open. So instead, we're going to come here and select New. Now we can save it under whatever name we want to create it as, and then you can select the file location, so where this is going to be held. So here, I'm just going to name it Imovie Master Class. And right now I'm okay with keeping it in the default location in movies. So I'm just going to click Save. So, as you can see, this eye Movie master class, this new library that I just created, has also now created an event with today's date. Now, this is just the default. This is always what's going to happen when you create a new library. But right now, I want to move this Eye Movie master class event into the Eye Movie master class library. Now, before I do that, I want to actually rename this event into the name of this project. And right now, because all of this footage is footage of a New York trip, that is what I'm going to name. So to rename it, all I have to do is click it and drag either up or down, and it gives me the option to edit it. So right here, I'm just going to name it New York trip. So now you can see we've renamed it. So now what we want to do is move it from this library, I movie library into the Imovie master class library that we created. So all we have to do is pull it up and then just hover over the library itself, I Movie Masterclass, and we just release. Now, as you can see, I just did that, but the New York trip hasn't actually so this is just a little bug that is present in eye movie. And we can fix that by just coming to projects and back to media. And as we can see, now it's actually populated. But now we have two New York trips here. So we want to get rid of this one right here, this duplicate one, right click it, and then come down here and click Delete event. And then select Continue. Now, I want to do the same thing with this default event that was created because I don't need this one either. So I'm going to right click it again and then come down here and click Delete event. No, I have this Eye movie library that I'm not going to really be using. So I have two options here. I can either delete it or just close it from Eye Movie. So I'm going to show you how we can close it and just remove it from Eye Movie, though it's not fully deleted. So all I have to do is come over here, right click it and then select close Library Eye movie Library. So right now, you've seen that it's not here in our dashboard anymore. But if we want to bring it back for whatever reason, we can then come back up here, come to file, then come down to open library. And as we can see it, it's right here. This is the one that we just closed Eye movie Library, if we select it, and now comes back. So again, because I don't want it here, I'm just going to right click it. And then click Close Library I Movie Library. So now we are just left with our New York trip event under our eye movie master class library. Now, the last thing to mention, if you want to move this project to a different computer, say something that isn't under your Apple ID where it's not going to sync, what you can do is go to the place where you save this. So like I told you, when we created this library, let me show you again. If we go to File, Open library, and select new, we are going to be saving the library somewhere. And on my computer, I saved it under movies, and this is going to be the default location if you're to do the same. So right now, I'm going to hit Cancel there and then come back to this I movie Master class. I can go into my files and find Eye Movie Master Class under movies. So what I'm going to do is hit Command in space, to bring up the spotlight search. And then I'm going to type in movies to get to the folder. So as I typed in movies, we see right here the folder, I can open this. So now we can see the location that we downloaded at. So it's under movies. And right here, this is the previous one that I just closed, and this is the one that I just created. So I movie master class. So right here, we can see it has 236 megabytes, and that is the collection of all of these footage. So what I'm able to do is then send this to another Mac or any other device that has IMV. And then they can open that file, and then this library, with all the footage, is going to be present there. But now we can come back to this footage that we are working with. So hovering over each clip, we see that they have a duration. This is 3 minutes. This one's 14 seconds. This one's 10 seconds, 13 seconds, 20 seconds, 35 seconds, and 11 seconds. Now, say I took all of this footage and I wanted to organize it a little bit more before getting ahead and going in a project. Well, an eye movie that's called rating clips, and that's what I'm going to show you how to do in the next lesson. 8. Rate and Tag Your Footage: Alright, now we've entered the last part and actually working with our media before heading into a project. And this last part that I'm talking about is actually organizing our clips to the biggest extent that we can now, and that is rating them. So essentially, what rating clips, footage or audio means is you are going to be assigning them some label. So the labels that we have here to work with are favorites or rejects. So the labels in themselves are quite self explanatory. So if we have part of footage that we know for sure that we're going to use, and we want to rate that on the footage and tell ourselves that to use in our project, then we can favorite it. So we know that one for sure we're going to use. And if there's parts of our footage that we know for sure we do not want to include, then we can basically reject it, label it as rejected, so it doesn't show up to us when we're working with it in the project. So let me show you how we can go ahead and do that. First, I'm going to be expanding on these clips a little bit. So to do that, we're going to come up here to the gear icon right here. I'm going to select it. And first, I'm going to increase the clip size a little. Then I'm going to increase the Zoom. So this first clip here is quite long. There's a lot of length to it, but there's really just not that much going on here because it's kind of just still almost like a time lapse. So here, in terms of rating it, I don't need to rate it. I personally wouldn't because it doesn't matter what part of this clip, I use or don't use. I would just pull it into my footage or into my project, and then I would cut it to whatever length I needed to be. But that's not going to be the same with all the footage here in this event. So for example, let's look at this one right here. So, this one is a 14 second clip. There's, you know, quite a bit going on here. Even though the camera doesn't really move, it is a little bit shaky. So in a later lesson, I can show you how we're going to be able to stabilize this footage, so it's not going to be shaky and it can be smooth. But I don't want the beginning of this clip because, you know, there's so many cars here that are blocking, you know, blocking the view. And say what I really care about in this clip is so let's say what I care about in this clip is this man that is hauling a carriage behind him. So what I want to do is I want to block out all of this kind of noise, all this here in the beginning that is going to be distracting from, you know, what I actually want to use this clip for. So what I can do is select a specific part of this clip. So what I'm going to do is start here in the beginning. I'm going to hover my mouse in the beginning, and then there's two ways that I can do this. Number one, the first one that I'm going to show you is holding R down on your keyboard. So you can hold R down on your keyboard and then click and be able to drag and select a portion of the clip that you want to rate. So I selected here, and I'm dragging to right about here where this last taxi is leaving the frame. So now that I have it selected, what I can do is then right click and then click Reject. So right now, I have this selected as rejecting this part of the footage. Alright, so now that I've rejected this footage, you can see that there is a little red line that is going over it. Right here, we see the time signature covering it a little bit. But we can see right there that there is a red line. So what I can do then is when I have this selected, you know, as rejected, I'm able to come here and filter. So right now it's filtered showing all clips. So there's nothing that it is excluding. So what I can do is select it, and then I can click on Hide rejected. So right now it is hiding basically all the rejected clips that I have labeled. Now I'm going to bring it back. So I'm going to go back to All clips, and we can see again, right here, there is the red line that we rejected and it's back. Now let's come to this clip, right here. This is a subway, and we see at the end that the subway train passes. So what I want to select here is I want to favorite all of it that has the subway. So what I can do, I can do the same thing as before, click R and then select, and this is able to select my range, or instead, I can click out of it, click it, and then I can grab from the sidebars right here. And the sidebars is going to be probably your easiest way to going about selecting part of your footage to rate. So right here, I dragged it to right about just the end of this subway. So what I'm able to do is I can right click it. I can select favorite, or I can come down here, I can click this heart, right here, I just unfavorited it, but I can select it again to add as a favorite. And then similarly, I can also reject it. So we can see that red line showing up on the top of it. But I want to favorite it. Now, the last way that we can favorite something is by clicking F on our keyboard. And now I favor this. Say I want to unfavored it, but I just want to use a keyboard shortcut. Then all I have to do is click U. If I click, then the favorite disappears. And if I want to favor it again, we can do one of the two methods I said earlier by right clicking it and hitting Favorite or coming to hit This heart, or I can just click F on my keyboard. And then if you go through and do this with a bunch of your clips, say you have a big project that you're about to work on, and you're favoriting all the pieces that you know you're going to use. Then you can come back up here to this filter, select all clips right now, and then you can go to Favorites, and then it'll show you only the parts that you favored it. Similarly, we can go to rejected. Now we see all the parts that we rejected. And then we can come here to A clips and we can also hide the reject. Hyde rejected is the view that I most commonly use myself because I don't necessarily favor everything that ends up in my eye movie project, because at the end of the day, I don't know what it is that I'm going to use, but oftentimes I do know for sure what I'm not going to use. This can be like the end of a clip where it's too shaky or it's something that I'm not capturing what I wanted to in that clip. So this is Hyde rejected view is the one that I most commonly use. Alright, well, that's it for the organization. Now it's actually time to get into Eye movie, and we can discuss the interface. 9. Trim and Work With Footage: Now it's actually time for us to hop in and get started with our project. And the first step in that is going to be working with the clips. So I'm going to go ahead here, click New York Trip and open this up. So we see we have eight pieces of media here, eight clips of footage. For this New York trip, I'm going to start it off with this one. So we're here during the day, and we're seeing this, you know, footage of Manhattan. So I'm going to click it. The entire clip is going to be selected, I can drag down here and release. So now if I put my playhead here in the beginning and I click space, it is now playing right here in this preview window from the beginning. So we see this clip is still video. There's not too much going on here. We see some boats going by, and we see the water. Now what I want to do is go ahead and add the next piece of footage. So that I'm going to choose to be a video in Time Square. What if I don't want to grab this entire piece of footage? Right? What if I want to just get this little part where it's panning right here? I don't want to get anything else. So there's two parts that there's two things that I can do to exclude this end part right here. I can hold R right here at the end of it, and then I can click and I can drag to then select only this bit. And then from here, what I'm able to do is drag it and then add it into the timeline right here. So now I have my mouse right here at this point in the timeline. I'm going to click space, so it's going to play from that point. And now we can see it goes into that next part. Also, notice how this piece of footage doesn't have any audio. While this one does have a bit of audio. It's not very loud, but we can notice that. So now we have two pieces of footage within our timeline. Now, if we look at the pieces that we got the footage from, we can see that there is an orange line under it. There's an orange line right here in the beginning of this clip, and there's an orange line that goes through the entirety of this clip. So obviously, this represents what pieces of footage are already in our timeline. With this piece, we had this entire one. The entirety of the 11.6 seconds is here. And with this piece of footage, we only have this beginning part. The full piece is 10.6 seconds. But if we look here, it's 3.5 seconds that we have in our timeline. So now let's go ahead and add another piece of footage in here. So, what I want to do is add this piece right here, which is just panning in Central Park Lake. So all I want in this one is to see this lake right here. So I want it to end right here. So like I showed you before, I can hold R and select, or another way I can do this is click O on my keyboard. So right now, you just saw, as I clicked O, this marked an outpoint. So it marked basically, this is the end of the footage that I want to select. This is the outpoint. Now, I can go back earlier in this footage and say, I don't want to have these people on the bench, right? I want to exclude them from my footage. So I can hover over this part right here where they are now excluded, and I can click I. So that has now been set as an endpoint. So I have an endpoint and I have an outpoint that is set. So I can do the same thing as before and drag this into my timeline, or what I can do is click This Plus button. And if I click this plus button, then it'll automatically add this selection I've made from this clip. Into the end of my timeline. So as we've been seeing, all of the clips that I added have been at the end of my timeline. But obviously, as you probably guessed, that's not the only way that I can add clips within my timeline. So what I can do instead, let's say I want to grab this 34 second clip. I can grab this clip, and then I can drag it to be right here. Let me show you that again. See how there's one clip right here and there's another clip right here. I can drag down, and now I place this in between both of those clips. Now, as you can see, my timeline is now stretching to where I can't see it all in one screen. What I would have to do is grab this to now look at the whole thing. But if I want to change that, I can come right here to this little Zoom icon, and I can basically change the Zoom of my timeline to fit the entire project. So what I have to do is now put it one back a toad. And then there we go. So now I'm able to see the entire project in its entirety, but I want to make it go a little faster than normal than the normal time speed, which is one X. What I can do is hit Spacebar at the beginning of this clip to play the clip, and then I can hit L. So let me show you how to do this. But before I show you how to do this, I'm first going to come and grab this volume bar. Right now, you saw it was at 100%. I'm going to drag it down to 0%. So you're still able to hear me as this is going through. So, here it is now going at regular speed. So I'm now going to click L. Now we saw how it sped up a little bit. I'm going to click L again. Now it's much faster. Click L again, and now it's going at Max speed. So basically from this point, what it does is it's not changing the speed of the clip in your movie. So every time you click L, it's not making it go faster. But what's happening is it's making your playback, basically you reviewing this, it's making the review speed faster. So you don't have to worry that you're making this clip much faster than you intend it to be in your final project. Now the same way that we can do it in here in our timeline, we can also do it in our preview footage right here. So let's say I want to do that to this clip. So I have my pointer, my mouse hovering over the beginning of this clip. And if I just click L, we see this playing. I click L again. Now it's going faster. Again, and it's even faster. And now you see this speed is going to be basically going through all of our clips right now because once we start one clip and we're just reviewing it, it goes through all of them. And I can change that right here and I can pause it from here, I can click back to go to the previous clip or to the beginning of the clip, and then back to the previous one, you know, as we see. So the same way in these clips that I'm able to click L and have it speed up, what I can also do is click J and have it go reverse. And the same rule applies where if I click J and click J again and again, it goes faster and faster every time I select it. Now, if we look at our keyboard, we see J and L are right next to each other. They're only separated by the letter K. Now, that is for a purpose because if we click L, which speeds it up, we can then select K, which pauses it. And then click J, and it reverses the footage. So this can be done both here with our preview clips, or it can be done in our timeline as well. So right now, I have my playhead right here in the middle of this clip, and I'm going to click J. And as we see, it's going backwards. I'm clicking J again, it's even faster, and now it's even faster. Now I'm going to click K. As you see, the K paused it. Now I'm going to click L to now go forward. I can click L again. It's faster, L again, it's faster. In terms of playback speed of your clips, we have those three letters that you're going to want to keep in mind, these three shortcuts. J, which makes it go backwards, we have K, which pauses the playback, and we have L, which speeds up the playback. Now, what's the other shortcut that we spoke about in this lesson? The other one we spoke about was the in and out markers. So in this footage, as I showed you before, let's say I'm playing this. I can click In to select an point. I can click In again to select another endpoint, and at whatever point, I could decide to click O, which is setting an outpoint. Now, you can do this as well within your timeline. So if I'm playing in my timeline, and I see that once I get these people out from the right, let's look at that again. Once I get these people out of here, that's when I want to select my endpoint because this is really where I want my footage to start. And now I want to cut it off to where I see someone else coming in the frame. So in order to do that, I'm going to have to go back in play back in my playback. So what I'm going to do is click J and rewind a little bit, and once they are out, I now pause the playback, and I can select Oh, to now set my outpoint. So now that I have these in and out points selected, I have all this excess from the left and from the right. So, so now that I have this in and out selected and I have all this excess from the left and right, what I want to do is only keep this bit right here, and I want to cut it from the rest. So what I can do in doing this, I can do a right click on my mouse and then come here to trim selection. So I'm going to click Trim selection. And now we see how the right and left all that excess footage is now gone. But say that you made a mistake and say that you actually wanted to include a few more seconds. Well, that's not a problem. What we can do here is we can click this footage. We can move over to the edge of it to where our mouse changes to have these two arrows, and then we can click and hold down and we can drag. So I can drag it to change this selection. So I liked how I had it before. So I'm just going to go back to that point, which was about right here. But as you can see, with any parts of these footage, you can grab them and put them out. And say, you just did what I did, and you only wanted to have this part selected, and you just dragged it out and you made a mistake. Now, I'm about to introduce you to the best keyboard shortcut. This is one that you're going to want to have in your toolbox. This is the best thing that really like we have at our disposal. And that is Command plus Z. So as you saw that Command Z, I just undid that. Now, there's going to be so many mistakes that you're going to be making when you're editing, and Command Z is going to be your best friend. Now, right next to Command Z, if you undid something that you didn't want to undo, what we can do with that is then hit Command Shift plus Z. So now we went back to how we did it before. But I want to go back, so I'm just going to do command S. Now I want to give you the last set of shortcuts. So this is going to be a shortcut that's going to help us put footage into our timeline. So, let's say I have my playhead right here in the middle of this clip. This clip is 11 seconds, so I have this about 6 seconds into this clip right here in the middle. So if I wanted to add, let's say this subway footage. So say we're doing a story, and this subway footage is basically an indicator that, you know, we went from outside of Manhattan, and then we took the subway inside to Manhattan to then end up right here. But this clip right here, 11.6 seconds. It's a little long, and I want to put this clip 6 seconds into this one. Oh, what I'm able to do is I'm able to come to this. I can click it. I can select the entire footage, or I can trim it down to where I have it favorited. Alternatively, I can then come up here and come to favorites to where I don't need to trim it down, and now it's giving me only the favorited version. So I'm going to go ahead and click this, which is the favorited clip. And now if I want to put it in right where my playhead is, we can see it. It's right here. I can then click W. And as you saw, what it did is place itself where that playhead was and it split up these two clips. Now we're left with a clip right here that comes after. And we don't want this clip. This clip is just excess footage that we want to get rid of our timeline. So in order to do that, what we can do is right click it to then delete the clip or much simpler option is to just hit delete on our keyboard. And now we have this clip, which is of the subway, and it's 9.7 seconds long. So let's just go ahead and watch this from the beginning. So we have a few seconds here of this beginning footage of Manhattan. Now we have the subway. And I want the subway to end just about here. All this excess is a little too much. I don't want it in our project. So what I'm able to do is I can come and grab it. And then shorten it to right here at that playhead. So now I took that footage that was a little too long, and I shortened it to our liking. Now, I'm going to go back up here and I'm going to go to All clips so I can see everything that we have at our disposal. And what I want to do is I want to select a nighttime footage. I want to select this one, and I want to put it at the end of our timeline. So as I showed you before, you could click this Plus button, and this is going to go ahead and place itself at the end of our timeline, as we just saw right there. But I'm going to go ahead and click Delete here, and I'm going to show you another way that we can do this. Also, additionally to this plus button, what we can click is W. If we click W, then that goes ahead and just adds it to our timeline. So again, we have all of this clip that we don't want to have in our project. It's a bunch of excess. So what we can do is go ahead and come to this point. I can click pause, and I can select right here. This is about the duration that I want the clip to be. So I can click here, I can right click, and I can click Split Clip. So now it made a cut right there. So the more efficient way to do this, I'm going to go ahead and click Command Z. The more efficient way to do this, so we don't have that extra clip that we'll then have to delete is from the beginning of this, we'll watch it, and right there is where I want it. So what I can do is select out, and the endpoint was automatically selected because if it has a outpoint, then it must have an endpoint. So then what I can do, as I did before, I can right click it and then select trim selection so it gets rid of all of the excess. And now, for our very final keyboard shortcut, it's going to be putting a piece of footage on top of some other footage. Let me just show you this really quickly. So you have all of these shortcuts in mind. So I have this 14 second clip, and my playhead, we can see is right here. So I'm going to take this 14 second clip, and what I'm going to do is I'm going to drag it. And as you can see above where I'm dragging, it's giving me the duration of the clip that I'm creating and shortening it. So I'm going to shorten it to 6.5 seconds. And I'm going to get rid of the part that I rejected. So now it's 4.5 seconds. So what I can do is click Q. And as you can see, my playhead was right here and I added this after my playhead above this footage. Now, we are going to talk about layering footage and what we can do with putting footage on top of each other in a later lesson. But this is the final keyboard shortcut that I wanted to show you in terms of working with our media and pulling it into our timeline. Alright, so I gave you a lot of shortcuts in this lesson, which is why I'm providing you with a shortcut guide in the resources. But right now, I'm going to do a quick review for you so you make sure that you have them all in mind. You have I and O, which are bundled together. I sets an in point in your footage, and O sets an outpoint. Then we have our bundle of J, K and L. J rewinds footage. K pauses playback, and L speeds it up. And remember, these are all next to each other on the keyboard. I and O next to each other. J, K and L are three right next to each other. And now our final one is QWE. Q takes selected footage and layers it on top of our playhead. W inserts footage beginning at our playhead, and if there's anything in between the footage, it will cut it. And E is a shortcut that helps us put our footage at the end of our timeline. Again, don't stress too much in remembering these all. As we go through the course, anytime I use a shortcut, I'll be verbalizing it. So as this goes on, it's really going to stick in your head. But in the meantime, I'm giving you a resource with all of these shortcuts in the resources in Utomi. And then also, along with that, I want you to just keep in mind that all of these shortcuts that kind of work together are bunched together on the keyboard. This one was a way that made me remember this much, much better. 10. Arrange Clips in Your iMovie Timeline: Okay, so now we're back in our project. And in this lesson, I want to talk a little bit more about using clips and rearranging clips within the timeline. So right now we see our timeline is zoomed out quite a bit. So to bring this in to see a little bit more information about what's going on, we can come right up here and zoom in to make these clips a little bigger. Oh, right now, I have this clip right here, which is Manhattan at night. It's a video basically of the entire city. And here we have, you know, a closer shot of, like, within the city. So in this movie, what I want it to end on is this clip right here, which is now second to last because I have the first clip, which is essentially the same as this clip, but it is at night. So I want to start it kind of how it ends off. Oh, basically, what I can do here now to rearrange these clips is I can select either one. Let's select this final one. And now with this yellow box around it, we know that it's fully selected. So what I can do is now grab this footage and then pull it over. And as you can see, it's now made space. So now if I release, it will go right here. So let's do that one more time. Let me grab this piece of footage. Oh. Let me grab this and pull it right here to the end. So now these two switch places again. So as you can see, I can grab either piece and pull it to the other side. Oh, I'm going to grab here and release right there. So now these two are in the order that I want them to be in. Now, if we look up top here, we get to see the full time of this movie. So from beginning to end, we see that this movie would be 39 seconds long. And right here, this 27 seconds is an indicator of what timestamp is my playhead at. So we see this great out playhead right here that is at 27 seconds. So let's say that I want this movie to be within 30 seconds. So right now there's 9 seconds of excess that I want to try and get rid of. So right now, what I think the best way to do to deal with this is to actually go through and shorten the clips that I think are going a little too long. So right now from just looking at this, I can see that this one right here looks at least visual to be the longest. But I can confirm this by hovering over them and seeing how long each of these clips actually are by this timestamp right here. So, this one is 7.3 seconds long. This one right next to it, 5.7. And then let's look at these two. This one's also 5.7. This one is 6.2 and this one is 6.2. So, like I thought, this one right here is the longest. So let's actually just go through, and I'm going to click right here to move the playhead right here and I'm going to hit space to actually play this movie. So I like this clip because it's like a transitionary clip to go into now being in the city. So we have this clip right here, which is us outside of the city, looking out from in Manhattan. And then here, this is like our subway kind of symbolizing us going into the city. But this is going way too long right now, in my opinion. So what I want to do is I want to shorten the clip. So what I can do in shortening the clip is I can hover at either end of the clip. I'm going to shorten it from, let's say, the beginning because the train is gaining speed as it goes on. So I can hover right here at the end, and we see these two arrows that are pointing left and right. So what I'm able to do is select it and pull it in. And now we get to see how long we want it to be. Let's say I want to shorten it to just 2.5 seconds. So I'll have it right about here. Now, let's review it and see how it looks. So again, I'm just clicking there and hitting space. Yeah, that's pretty good. I think it could be honestly a little longer than that. So what I'm going to do is I'll just grab it here, the same place as before, and now I'm going to pull it outwards to make it a little bit longer. Now I'll pull it to 4 seconds. So we can see with these changes, the time of the entire clip is now 36 seconds, the time of this entire project. So we brought it down from the 39 seconds now to 36 seconds. And there's a bunch more places in this movie that if I wanted to, I could go ahead and take off some. But instead, I want to show you another way that we can work with clips in the timeline, and that's going to be duplicating footage. So as I showed you before, we see these orange lines that are at the bottom of our clips in our media library. And these lines basically indicate what is already in our projects. So, it doesn't mean that we can't still pull those clips and use them again within our timeline. So let me show you this one, for example, because it's majority of this clip. I can still grab this and pull it in and put it wherever. So now this piece of footage is duplicated, this beginning piece. Let me zoom out a little bit so you can have a better view of this. So, this piece is now duplicated. But what if I already have a certain piece, a certain clip that I already have trimmed to the duration that I want it to? Oh, instead of having to pull from here and then trim again and do the entire process, instead of what I can do, first, I'm going to delete this, and now I can come to this, and I can click Command Copy. Or I can right click it and click Copy here. Now, if I move my playhead wherever I wanted to, let's say I'm moving it here at the end, I can now click Command V, which now paste this exact same clip. So we see 5.7 seconds, and this one is also 5.7 seconds. Oh, this is the exact same clip that I have. Now, what if I want to cut a clip? So basically getting rid of the clip, but also copying it at the same time. What I can do there is I can select a clip that I want to copy, this one, and I can click Command X. So now it's cut, but I can still hit Command V, to paste it. But what if I decided that I wanted to change up the order of multiple pieces of footage at once? So what I'm able to do in that is I can select anywhere within the timeline. I can select it and I can drag. And basically, I'm able to select as many pieces of footage as I want. So let's say I want to grab these last three pieces of footage. And I want to move them to the beginning. So just as it was before in moving a single piece of footage, what I can do is grab all of these, and at any point, at any break within these pieces of footage, I can put these three. So if I want to put them in the middle, I can if I want to put it all the way here in the beginning, I can. All I have to do is release. But this isn't the order I actually want them in. So right now, I want to go back to how it was before. So what I can do is hit Command Z to undo. And if you have a different kind of keyboard and you just don't want to use the keystroke, what you can also do is come here into Edit, and then you can click Redo Move or Undo Move. So redoing is going to be Command Shift Z. That's going to be going back to what you originally had it as prior or after a undo. So if I wanted to go back to having these clips here in the beginning, I can hit Command Chef Z, which basically undos my undo. So, but I don't want that, so I'm going to hit Command Z to go back to this. Now I'm going to get rid of this final clip because I don't want that there. So what I showed you in the last part of the lesson, I showed you that we can basically grab any portion of a clip. If we hold R and click and drag, we can select any portion and then right click this and then say trim selection. So it will trim everything that is outside of what we selected. So let's do that. We see that it just did it there. I'm going to undo this. Now, what if we want to just split a clip? We just want to have a clip that is split at a part that we designate. So all we have to do for that one is we select here, select at any point. Now my playhead is here, and all we do is right click and then click Split Clip. So now these two clips are split. If we play them, we see that there's no issue, that they play smoothly because they're split, they're not separated. But if I grab this and now I move it over here, I now put half of the clip in the beginning and half at the end. So let's see how that looks. Alright. So, let's go ahead and put this one back into its original spot. And actually, what I'm going to do now is undo it to where it was prior to us cutting it. So I'm going to hit Command Z, which puts it back to there and Command Z again and Command Z a third time. So now we're back here, and this clip click isn't cut anymore. So another way that we can do it is simply select the point that we want to be cut. And then instead of right clicking and hit trimming, all I have to do is hit Command B, and it cuts wherever my playhead is. So we don't even need to actually select a portion for this to be done. Instead, if I just have my playhead, my pointer, my mouse, at any point, and I hit Command B, it cuts right there. It cuts right here. So I'm going to hit Command Z and redo all of this. Now, I want to point out a distinction here. If I were to right click right here without pointing anything without actually making a selection like a left click. And I hit split clip. We see that this clip didn't split. This one did. And that's because the actual playhead is over here. But if I were to be over here and hit Command B, we see that it splits right here. So if you're making a split with your right click, then you have to make sure that whatever part you want to actually be split, you have it selected prior. 11. Layer Footage for Visual Impact: So before in this course, we saw that there was a possibility if we selected any piece of footage from our library and selected Q, that would layer the footage on top of the footage that we had at our playhead. Now, some of you may have saw that and thought, Well, what's that doing? Now, in our timeline, it consists of two timelines, a primary timeline, which is this bottom one, and a secondary timeline, which is the top. Now, solely from the names, you might assume that the primary timeline takes precedent over the secondary timeline. But that's not true. Any footage that is on the secondary timeline, above footage that's in the primary timeline, the secondary timeline is the footage that is going to be shown. So as we can see here, prior to doing this, here, I'm going to hit Command Z to undo. And we can see. If we click Play, we get to see this entire sequence. We see this part of the city and then here on the water. Now I'm going to hit Command Shift Z to bring this back. Now, if I hit play here, let's look at what happens. We see right as that point hits, and now we see this. So you might be wondering, why would this be the case? Why would we even want to put footage on top of this? If we wanted it to be here, why wouldn't we just put our playhead here, hit Command B to split the clip, and then select the entire clip and place it right here like this. Well, as I'll show you later in the course, there's going to be many situations where we're going to want to layer footage on top of our primary timeline. This can be for a multitude of reasons. But for now in this lesson, I'm going to go ahead and layer the footage. For the purpose of having some continuity. So what do I mean by that? Well, first, I'm going to get rid of this bit of footage. And I'm also going to undo to the point before I made this cut. So, right here, we're back here in the beginning. And what I want to do is layer this piece of footage on top of this piece. And instead of making cuts along the way, I want this to kind of remain static in time. So I don't want there to be any gaps in terms of when it shows back this footage. I want it to be kind of like it was happening in real time. So what do I mean by this? So let me first drag this piece of footage on top of this. So, as we can see, in this piece of footage, if I were to put you right here and show you this piece of footage and I were to show you this piece right here, separately, and you only saw the footage itself and you didn't see anything in the timeline, you wouldn't be able to tell what came first or what came second. You know? You can't tell any kind of continuity there. But I'm going to go ahead and move this. If we look at this piece of clip, you know, we see people, we see cars. We see this person on a bike that's like pulling a carriage. So we could know that if we see this piece of clip and we see the end right here, we know that this part came after this first part. Now, because this is towards the end of the movie, I want to have some kind of finishing sequence. So in this sequence, I want to make it go between this piece and my last piece of footage. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to come over to this piece, and I'm going to make small cuts. Let's say, right here, I'm going to hover over and hit Command B. I'm going to come over here and hit Command B. And as you can see, they're not cutting at my mouse. That's because of how much of this is zoomed in. If I were to zoom it much further in, we could see that the cuts are actually taking place where my playhead is going. But it's because these clips can only be so small in the timeline, there is a there is, like, the smallest amount that it can be. So that's why that is showing and making it look like that these cuts are happening after my playhead. But really, they're not. Alright, so I'm going to make one more cut right here zoomed in. See now that I zoom in, it actually cuts at the correct place. And I'm going to pull this piece, and I'm going to make it a little bit shorter. So right now, these are all at 1.2 seconds, and this one's at 1.1. I want to shorten them all to 1 second. So I just pull it from the end right here. I can pull this one from the end, and I can pull this one also from the end. So I'm going to zoom back out a little bit here. And now what I want to do is I'm going to pull this on top and I'm going to layer the footage at these increments. So let's say I'll put one here, one here and one here. So now let's look at how this is going to be visual. So if this was an actual movie I was creating, I don't know if I would have this end sequence as a part of it, but this is mainly just an example to show you how we can use this layering and basically implement it to our projects to make basically whatever kind of, you know, creative vision that we want. And just as another example of doing this, let's go back here to the beginning of the timeline with this two. As I said in a prior lesson, I wanted this subway to kind of be a transitionary clip between going from looking at the city from the outside to then having this, you know, subway, which is transportation and then coming right here in the center of the city to Times Square. So I can do in this is I can pull this clip and have it sit on the secondary timeline. And similar to what I did here, what I'm able to do is I can come in. I'll zoom in, so we're making more precise cuts here, and I can make little cuts. So again, I'm hitting Command B to make this cut, Command B, to make this one, Command B to make that, Command B here, and I'll do one more cut right here. Command B. Now, this piece of footage, I'll just delete because I don't need all of that. All right so now I have these four pieces of clips that I can now pull and place wherever I want to on top of these clips. So, kind of like how I did before, I'm going to use these layering as a kind of transition. So we're going to be going from outside of the city to inside Times Square, and we're going to be doing so by the subway. So let's look at how this is going to see. So, there we go. We have that little sequence. And honestly, I'm going to take off this first one because I think it's a bit long. It doesn't need to be like that. So I'm going to pull this and make this one like that. Let's look at it again. Alright, so we have now made our transition into the city using layering of our footage. 12. Work With Audio Within iMovie: So we're here in our project. And the last lesson, we worked with layering footage to create this little sequence right here. If we're looking at a project as a whole, right now, it's ordered. We have this layering. But one thing that it is surely missing is any kind of character in terms of sound. For example, the most pressing one, if we look right here in the beginning, there's nothing going on. It's completely silent. And even when we get to this train right here, there's nothing going on. The first piece of audio that we get is associated with this piece of footage, if we just click Play. So, we want to add this. We want to add some more character to the movie, and we want to add some audio. The way that we can do this, this entire time, we've been in the media section. But if we come up here, we can select audio and video. And right here on the left, we can have sound effects selected. Now, I movie gives us an extremely large selection of sound effects to use in this. As you can see, there's so much here to use. So for this first clip right here, we have water, and I'm just going to type in C and see what we get. This one, ship and HC, little dramatic. We don't need all that. And right here, I don't see anything that would clearly fit what we're trying to have. So actually, maybe the Seagulls will work. I think this one would work perfectly fine. It is a little loud and might be a little obnoxious. So there is a way that we can actually deal with that. So what I'm going to do, I want to use this piece of audio. So I can just click it and drag it and bring it under this piece of footage. So as you can see, along with the footage, the media that we can actually see, there is a layer below it where we put sound effects and we put music, which we'll go over later and basically anything that has to do with the audio. And now, like I said before, I think this is a little too loud. Let's play it again. Yeah. So I think for sure, I want to decrease the volume on that. So what I can do is hover over this, and we see this little line right here. If I put my mouse over the line, we see an up and down arrow, and if I just select, I can then drag this down, let's say, 50% volume. So now, if we play it back, This sound effect is going extremely long. So what I want to do is I want to fit it to just this clip. So I can grab it from here, this side, and pull it in. And as you can see, it clips in to the end of this clip. So it kind of just, like, snaps in like a magnet, so it gets something that's precise. So now let's look back at it. So right now, it comes in right here. As this ends and the other clip starts, we see the end of our seagull sound effect. There is something else that's going on in between this, and that is the train transition. And when the train comes, I don't want to have any Siegel sound effect. Instead, what I want to have is a sound effect associated with this train. Now, first off, what I want to do is I want to shorten this even further to line up with the first train sound effect. So I'm going to pull it in to come right about here. So I can make that selection and then drag, let's say here. That lines up quite good. So now I can come back here into the sound effects, and I can search up a sound effect that I would like. So here we have two train passes. Let's listen to both and see which one fits better. So this bottom one sounds more like doesn't sound very subway train like. Sounds like a coal engine. So I want to do this top one because it fits a little better. So what I can do is I can drag it down, but there's another way that I can deal with this. So if there's a specific part of the sound effect that I like, I can select it up top here in the preview. So let me show you right here. If I hover over this, we can hear each specific part. Okay, so I kind of like here how it fades out here at the end. So I want to be able to select this final part. So what I can do is select wherever I want this audio to start. Let's say we about here, and I can click I. So now you saw the selection window get shorter and come right to where my mouse is. So now it's selected right there, and what I'm able to do is move my mouse, grab this and drag it down to now have it lined up with the train. So I'm going to have it line up to just about the end of this Siegel track. So I'm going to shorten it a little bit right here from the beginning and then move it in to try to line up with just about the end of the train clip. So let's watch from the beginning now. Alright, so that was a nice little natural fade into this. But as you can see, it's still quite loud. So what I can do is grab this. Right now, it's at 100% volume, and we're gonna decrease it to, let's say, 22%. So let's go back here from the start and try again. All right. So now that's something that's a little bit more smooth in terms of having that transition, but also giving our movie a little bit more character. As you can see, with this clip, there's already some audio attached to it. So let's listen to it again here. Now, it's not too much going on, but, you know, there is still some kind of audio that makes it feel like, you know, the person watching it, that this movie has a little bit more life and that we're actually there. Now, let's move on to this next clip. As we can hear or can't, in this case, there's nothing going on. So what I want to do is add something that's going to be, you know, a little fitting to this kind of scene. So I can come back up here and type Lake, and we have Water Lake sound effect. Let's listen to how it goes. So, this one is nice and all, but it sounds more like someone is actually on the lake, so we don't want that. So right now, there's no other lake sound effects that we have. Now, this is something that is going to be a key in editing that I'm going to show you and that I kind of showed you here in the beginning with Siegel's. Oftentimes, we're not going to be able to find the sound effects or stock footage that matches perfectly with what we want to convey in our movie. So in cases like this, we have to find stuff that is tangential. So basically, things that might not on the surface or in their intention and being recorded supposed to fit exactly what we're doing. But because everything is interpretation and it's how we present it, in matching them together, they fit. So, for example, instead of having some lake sound effect or even people walking, I can just have an animal that is going to be, you know, normal or accustomed to this lake setting. So let's say some ducks. Let's see me search this up and see if we find any. Yeah, we have a duck right here. Right. And now, this sounds like just about what you would hear if you're around a lake. And what we can do is decrease the volume, so it sounds like it's something more in the distance. Now, I'm just gonna grab it and drag it down to fit right here. See how this fits kind of exactly what I was saying. Like, this sound effect is probably recorded with a duck standing right there. And our footage, we don't see a duck, but it's very well plausible. This fits perfectly fine in having the sound effect with our footage. So I'm going to go ahead and turn this volume down. As we can see on these waveforms in this audio, we have these yellow pieces. And if we look super closely right about here, we see that there's a red. So this is basically telling us how loud this sound effect is. And stuff in the yellow range is like this is increasing a decimal mark which, you know, you might want to be mindful including in your footage. And then if it goes into the red, this is saying, this is extremely loud, so pay attention to this. So, I'm going to grab this as we did before, this little line that's right here. And I'm going to drag it down. And you see now it's at 60%. None of that bit is in the yellow or even red at this point. So I'm going to drag it down to, let's say, 18%. And now we can listen back to this. Now, this is still a little bit loud. So what I want to do is bring it down to let's say, 10%. Okay. So now what we see here is at the end, we see that there's a little cut. And because we are now editing the sound effect, if this was our actual video and that happened, you know, we could leave it in whatever. But we have full creative control and being able to change to make it a little bit more smooth. So, the first thing that I'm going to do is I'm going to trim this audio if I'm going to zoom in closely, actually, so you can see this a little bit more clear. So what we can do is trim this audio to where I get rid of that little, like, half quack that we have. So I'll trim it to here to where now, let's play it again. It just ends off being silent. Now, another thing that I'm noticing in this is that these quacks are quite repetitive. We don't need to have that many. So what I can do is now, come to this, as I were with the footage, I can hover over and I can hit Command B. So now I've split this footage. Or I've split this audio. Now, I can do the same thing as before, and I can click at any point and right click and then hit split clip, and now I've split this audio even further. So, what I want to do is have Max four quacks in this audio. So right now, I have it like a mini Quack, and then one full one, and these two right here. So what I want to do is cut these two out. So either I can hit Command B, I can right click and hit cut or I can just drag this end and pull it in. So now we have four quacks. And here, I'm going to cut this one so I can separate it as well. So now I have all these individual ones that I can move around and put wherever I want. So I'm going to space them out a little bit, and I'll put these two right here in the beginning, and I'll bunch these two together at the end to make it feel, you know, a little more natural and something that's not as annoying as those consistent quacks. So let's go here and listen again. I think that's much better if you ask me. It's not as annoying, and it still gives some, you know, character and depth to the clip. Now, if this is something that you know that you're gonna do beforehand, one thing that I want to give a tip to you where I did it in doing this, but I didn't mention it is when you're going to be adjusting the volume of these clips. Say I were to have pulled this clip in and I did the splits, and then I went and individually changed each piece of volume, that's just tedious. So it's better. What I recommend to you is pull in the entire clip and then adjust the volume for that entire clip at once and then do your cutting to split it up because see, after what I just did, I don't have to go and adjust the volume four times now. It was already done in that first time after I cut it. So now, these are all good let's go back and review from the beginning how this all sounds. Okay, now, we have this clip right here, which has a little bit of audio, but I can't really hear much of what's going on. So, I'm so we have this clip here, and I can't really hear too much of what's going on. So let's zoom in and see what we can do here. So let's play it right here from the beginning. Now, looking at this clip in isolation, you know, there's some birds chirping. It's nice. But there is this background kind of, like, whizzing that I'm not really liking in this a lot. So let's listen to it one more time. So I get a little bit more clear audio. Now, to mute this, we see that this isn't something that I just dropped in as a separate sound effect. This is actually a part of this video. So what I can do, I can approach this in two ways. First, I can kind of do what I did with the sound effects in taking this little line and dragging it down to muting it, right? So now let's play this again from the beginning. We see we don't have any volume. But another way that I can go about doing this is selecting this clip and coming up here to the volume. And I'm basically able to adjust it right here. So you can go to, you know, 100%, but you can also go past it and up to 400%. There's not really, in my experience, going to be many times where you're going to be increasing the volume of clips. Maybe if someone's very far away from the mic, and, you know, you can't hear them very well. You might increase it past 100%. But for the most part, you're most commonly going to be decreasing the sound effect, decreasing the volume of sound effects because sound effects come to us extremely loud, and we usually want to have them as secondary parts. We don't want the sound effect to kind of take over the whole video. We want to have them as supplementals. So in doing that, you want to decrease the decibels by, you know, quite a bit. So I'm going to go ahead and turn this one all the way down to zero. And I'm going to look in here sound effects for birds. I type in Bird, I get nothing. I can rephrase it and say chirping, and I get nothing. So in this situation, what do we do? Well, we're not just working in I movie in isolation. We are on our max, we're on our devices, so we might as well use the resources given to us in the Internet. So what we're able to do is whatever sound effect we can't unteer, there's one place where we're almost certain to find it, and that's YouTube. Now, later in this course, I'll go into a deeper dive of how we can use YouTube to our advantage to get things like sound effects, for example, to add into our movies. But for now, I'm going to go ahead and just show you a quick overview of how we can do this. Okay, well, first, we have to go to YouTube. So all I did here on YouTube, I searched Burge chirping sound effect, no copyright. So let's go ahead and click this video. Emo can help people customize and save it Liberty Mutual. So, I think the sound effect works perfectly fine. And there's two ways we can go about getting this sound effect. First off, we can download a YouTube downloader to then download this video and just pull the audio from it. But that's going to take a little bit longer. That's something I'll go over later. Right? Now, the faster way to do this is to just screen record it so we can get that audio and put it into our movie. Alright, so now we're back in our project, and I screen recorded it, and I want to pull it in. So what I have to do is come up here to my uploads, select this, scroll down, and the place that I put it was right here. Oh, I can click Import selected, and I screen recorded it on my phone and brought it in. We see this is a 16 second clip. So now this clip has the audio with it, but I don't want the video. So how is it that I can pull the audio from it and get rid of the video? Well, to do that, what we have to do is drag this piece into our timeline. And I'm going to go ahead and just select this and put this on top. So now, what I can do is I can right click this clip, and then right here, I can click Detach Audio. So now we see that the audio has come right here below in the sound effects in the audio section, and we see this original clip has no audio associated with it. So now what I can do is just select this and hit Delete. So now we're left with just this audio. So let's go through and listen to it. It's going to be quite loud, just a warning. O. Okay, so I like it coming up to just about here. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to click it and then hit Command B. Now I'm going to select this part that I don't want and hit Delete. And now I can just adjust this to come about right at the end. Now what I want to do is decrease the sound in this to make it a little bit more ambient. Okay, that's a lot better. Now, a lot of you might be saying to yourself, why would I do all of that? Now, in your case, this is gonna be up to you. You may or may not want to do it. But one thing that I do want to say is that in Hollywood, in movies, when people are professionally creating videos, it is very often that the stuff that you see actually happening on the screen and the sounds associated with that aren't actually coming from the video and from that real time footage. So when you hear footsteps or when you hear any ruffling of papers, oftentimes, these things are added in post production. There are separate sound effects anyone, the video editors added themselves. This is something that may not be intuitive, but it's something that can really increase, you know, the quality of our movies in the super subtle way that, honestly, was super fast that I just did in a few minutes. So now let's zoom out a bit and look at our entire footage from this point on. Okay. So now, looking at these final two bits. This one, we have a little bit of chatter. We have some cars driving by, and we're able to hear all of that. And honestly, I like this. Like, I'm fine with this. But what I do want to do is I want to turn it down just a tad bit because we don't need it to be all that loud. Let's pull it down to about 50%, and now let's listen. And I'll go ahead and turn it down just a tad bit more to let's say 22. Okay. This is much better. Now, let's go ahead and look at this last bit. There's one thing I want to point out here. That entire clip is basically just this woman coughing. So what I want to do is I want to get rid of that. And as I said before, this piece of footage, it doesn't really matter what point I use in it because visually, let's extend this right here. Visually, it's all the same. So what I can do is trim this so where I cut out that woman's cough, and then I can pull it back in, let's say, 2.5 seconds. Now let's play. And we got that. So now I'm just going to decrease the volume so let's say 20% so we don't have all that rumbling. Yeah, and now it's just a calming little end to this movie. 13. Refine Audio for Clean Sound in iMovie: Okay. So now we're back in this project, and one of the main goals in editing and putting together this movie is that we want to make something that is smooth. We want our finished product to feel refined, something that isn't going to be very rough on the edges. And right now, given that we just added all of these sound effects in audio, what we want to do here is further refine it to make it a little bit more smooth. So, what do I mean by this? Well, if we start here in the beginning, let's listen to this first piece with the Seagulls going in to the train. We saw right there that was quite abrupt. The Segels right into the train was something that was bam. First off, we see that there's a large difference in the audio. The audio got much louder here, and it kind of jolts the viewer in a place where you don't want to be jolted. Now, there are places in our edits and the projects that we'll be creating where we might want to grab the viewers attention. Here, that's not what I'm intending. So in order to fix this, the easiest way that we can address this is with fading our audio. So a fade can be done by grabbing these small balls right here at the end of these videos. So you see at the end of the sound effects, I mean, we see these little balls, and we're able to grab them and pull them out to whatever distance we want to have this kind of fade effect come into play. So what this fade does is basically it starts the audio at zero and gradually increases the audio to the point where you set this ball to end at. So right now, it's going to be entering here, and you can kind of see it in this um, kind of black area right here that's darker than the rest. We see how this kind of fades in, where the audio is going to start here at the bottom, and as it goes on, it's going to get louder. So let's start here from the beginning and see how this works. Okay, so right there, honestly, is much better. Now, for your reference, I'm going to play it one more time, and then I'm going to get rid of the fade to see the difference that it made. So let's go ahead and play this. Now, again, without the fade, I'm going to hit Command Z to get rid of it. Now, again, I'm going to put back that fade. It is much smoother here. Now, if I wanted to, which I do, I'm going to decrease this audio in the slightest bit. We're gonna go to 18%. So let's listen to this again. Now, in the prior lesson, when we added these, I intentionally chose the end of this train clip so there could be a natural fade. But as you can see, you don't have to do that. You don't have to choose some piece of audio where there is a fade in the audio itself because we can create it ourselves. So, let me go ahead and come back here to this fade, and I'm going to increase it, and I'm going to make it extremely faded, and I'm going to do all the way to the end, and let's see the difference that makes. Now, you see, that's kind of just like almost like a whoosh sound effect where you don't really hear it that much. So that's why I'm gonna put it back here in the beginning of it. We'll play again. So it's just a lot more smooth there. Now, I can do the same thing with the Seagull sound effect because we go from the Seagulls directly into the train, or really, we go into the Seagulls into no audio. So there's just a cut for a fraction of a second until the train comes in. So I want to smoothen that out a little bit, and I want to fade out the Seagulls. So I can grab this ball right here at the end of it, and I can pull this here and I can start to fade whenever I want to. I'll start to fade about 1 second before the clip ends. So let's go ahead and do that. H. So we see there, I faded out right there towards the end and almost gave the impression that something was coming here, a transition or just a change in footage was about to happen, and it did. I like how that ended up. Now, as you may or may not have guessed, we can do the exact same thing if the audio is attached to the footage. So like we see right here in this blue area, we see that this clip has audio attached to it. So in the same way that we're able to fade this audio, we're also able to fade this audio. So let's go through and listen to it. And we see right here, there is an abrupt change in the audio. We go from the kind of noise of the city to them ducks quacking and the kind of tranquility of a lake. So let's go through and listen to this again. We can make that much smoother. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to grab this blue bubble right here and I'm going to pull it out. We'll have it also fading out, starting at about 1 second before the clip ends. So this is a much nicer transition because we don't want something, you know, as big and bustling as, you know, Times Square and all the sound that's gonna be coming with that to then going into a nice lake in Central Park. So this is a much smoother way that we can go about doing this. So let's go ahead and listen to the rest of this movie to see if there's any other parts that we want to refine. Okay, so right here, this is, I think, a perfect example of another place that we could fade the audio. So we have right here, if we're going to come to the end of this lake to the beginning of that, we see that it's like the audio comes in in the beginning of a chirp. See, there's a cut there. So what we can do grab this, fade it out a little bit, and then come back here. Now, listen to that. It's so much smoother. Ready? I'm going to go back and hit Command Z, so you can listen to how it was before. Now, I'm gonna hit Command Shift Z to put back the fade, and now Much better, much more smooth. Now, let's continue. There, it's honestly not that abrupt because the chirps kind of are fading out naturally. But, you know, just to make it that much more smooth, I'll pull out a little bit of a fade here. Okay. Now, here from this piece of footage to this one, there is a little bit of an abruptness. So I'm going to pull this out the tad bit. And there, it's much smoother. So this is going to be a key in dealing with audio, sound effects, music, whatever. Fading your sound is going to make the transitions between clips and sound effects that much more smooth. 14. Review and Practice Editing Basics: Okay, you've just completed the editing basics. Congratulations. Now, there's so much more that we're going to go over within this course. But I want this to serve as a small checkpoint. So we can go back and review what we've learned because although it's only been a few lessons, you already know so much. Okay, so let's hop back in our project and see what we learned. So, first and foremost, the first thing that we learned in working with these clips is how we can select the entire clip and drag it in and bring it into our timeline. That one is easy stuff. So let's go ahead and delete this. And another review to this is we can hit this plus button, and it adds it in at the end of our sequence. All right, we'll delete this one now. Another way that we can add clips to our timeline is by selecting range. And we can select arrange by three different ways. So the first way in selecting range is by selecting the clip and then dragging the ends of it to select whatever range we want. So because this is a three minute clip, I want to be able to get a little bit more specific in the range that I want to select. Let's say. So I'm going to come up here to the settings icon, and first, I'll increase the clip size a little bit. But secondly, and more importantly, I'm going to increase the Zoom. So let's increase the Zoom to, let's say, ten minute increments. So now we have each one of these thumbnails. Represents these ten second increments that I have delineated right here in the Zoom. We have all these ten second increments, and say, I want to choose from the beginning of this clip, the very beginning to let's say about this point. So what I can do is I can hover my mouse here and then select O on my keyboard. So now I set an outpoint. So this outpoint on this footage, I can now grab it and put it right into here. So we can see this is 58 seconds long and not the entire 3 minutes from this whole piece of media. So that's one way that we can select parts of our footage, right? We have our in and we have our out. Right? Now, another way that we can go about doing this is by simply grabbing the sides and pulling, and we're able to pull this to whatever range that we want it to be. So I'm going to go ahead and delete what is here in my timeline and pull this down to here. So now we see that part of this footage is labeled orange. So that just means that this is the part of the footage that's in my timeline, that's in my project. So we go ahead and delete that. Now, the last way of selecting part of footage is by holding R down on your keyboard and selecting and pulling. So you can pull it to whatever duration you want it to be. Okay? So that's selecting footage and putting it in our timeline. So I'm going to go ahead and decrease the Zoom back to normal so we can see everything here. Now, another thing that we worked on was rearranging clips in our timeline. This is also a very easy thing to do. So we can grab it and we can put the footage wherever we want. And then another review to undo what we just did, we can do Command plus Z. And I'm going to do it again because there was two separate actions that I wanted to undo. Now, if I wanted to actually have it in the place that it was before, so that first action that I did, I can hit Command Shift C, which does a redo. So I actually want to have it at the end, so I'm going to keep it there. But if you want to do that in another way, then you can come up here and go to Edit. And you have undo and you have redo that you can select here instead of doing those key strokes. So other ways that we were working with footage was copying and deleting. So to copy a piece of footage, we just click it and hit Command C. And then we can paste it to wherever we put our playhead. I'm pasting it right here at the end. All right. So that's easy enough. Now, I select it and hit Delete to get rid of it. Now, another way that we can pull footage from our media into our timeline is with our keystrokes. So we have a couple of those. First, we can hit E. So I selected this. This is entire footage, and I'm going to click E, and what that will do is put it at the end of our timeline. E, it's pretty easy to remember. So I'm going to go ahead and delete this, and now I'm going to put my playhead right before this last piece of footage, and I'm going to go ahead and select this piece. So with this one, now, if I click W, what that will do is put the footage right where this playhead is. So I select the footage, and I'm going to select it in its entirety and hit W. So now, as you saw, what that did was put it right in between these two pieces of footage, exactly where the playhead was. Now, if I have the playhead in between a piece of footage, let's say right here, it splits it. So I'm going to do the exact same thing. You see, my playhead is in between this piece. If I hit W, now what that just did was split split my footage into two parts, and it pasted it exactly where the playhead was. So I'm going to go ahead and click Command Z. To now undo that. Now, the last way that we're bringing footage into our timeline is with the key Q. Now, what does Q do? Q pulls the footage and layers it on top. So let's go ahead and click this and click Q. So as we see, this piece of footage is now on our secondary timeline. So I'm going to go ahead and delete this. Now, what's our secondary timeline? Let's bring another piece right in to explain this again. Our secondary timeline is going to be what takes precedent over our primary timeline. So any footage that is on top of any other footage in our timeline is what's going to be shown. So as we see here, we have this piece of footage, which is on top of this Manhattan at night, and we see only this top piece of footage, and we don't see what's under it. Now, if I drag this out, we can now look at this piece, and if I drag this back up, it's covered now. Now, selecting in and out ranges isn't just helpful in selecting media to bring into our timeline. This in and out range can also help us in our timeline. So right here, if I select I, I now set an in range and I'm going to hit space. Now, let's say I'm stopping right here. I can hit O to set the out range. Now, if I want to get rid of everything that is outside of this range, all I have to do is click Trim selection, and all of that has now been trimmed. So I can now hit Command Z to undo that. Now, say that you want to select a range and you want to loop this range. So why would we do that? So this is going to be most useful. And when you're doing specific edits to a specific part, maybe you're just editing the audio and you want to hear basically the volume, and you want to keep that section looped. So let's say I'm selecting a range right here on this clip. So I'm going to click I right here and I'm going to click O right here at this end. So what I can do is select the forward slash, and then that immediately plays my range. But as we see, it's not looping. So how do we do that? What we can do is select Command plus L, and that now loops this section. So if I were to hit forward slash again, let's look at what happens. It looped the playback. And if you don't want to use Command and, what you can use otherwise is this. If you come up to view, you can select Loop playback, and it will loop. Now, as we just saw, if we hit the forward slash, it plays in our range. Now, if we hit backward slash, what that does is it plays from the beginning of our project. So let's go ahead and do that. So right there with just one keystroke, we were able to play it from the beginning of our project. Now, if we're trying to go through our project at a faster pace, what we're able to do is hit play at any point and select the letter L on our keyboard. We see that faster, faster, and faster, right, right? Now, if we want to do the opposite of that and we want to reverse the playback and go backwards, what we're able to do is hit J. I hit J again and it'll become faster. Now, if we want to pause that, we can either hit pause or we can hit K, which will pause it right where the playback is. Then following all of that, we learn how to work with sound effects. So if we come up here and come to audio and video, we have all of these sound effects that we can work with. And then within these sound effects, some of them are assigned genres. So what we can do is come over here to the effects and basically filter through and select the ones that we want to use. So right now, it's selected to all of them, so we can see all of them. And within each effect, if we wanted to select a simple range, all we have to do is just as before, click I at whatever point that we want to set the in point and then O to whatever point we want to set the outpoint. And we could just grab this selection and put it anywhere within our timeline. So the next thing that we can do when we have these things set, let's work with bubbles. What we're able to do is now pull this and trim it a little bit, and now listening back to it, let's see how it sounds. It's quite loud. So if you want to reduce the volume on this, what we're able to do is drag this down. Let's put it at 18%. And there, it's still quite loud. So I'm going to reduce it even more so let's say 7%. And if I want to add a fade into it, so it's not going to be abrupt, what I can do is grab this and pull it out. So now it's going to be fading in. Let's see how it sounds. Now, as you can see, this ended and replayed from the beginning. If we don't want this to happen, then all we have to do is hit Command L to turn off the looped playback. So let's try that again. So you see right here, it just stopped at the end. Now, I'm going to go ahead and delete this. And if we're looking at within these clips, we get to see that we're able to do this fade just as we are with the sole audio clips with the audio that is attached to some footage. So I can go ahead and increase or decrease this fade right here. Alright? See? That was quite a bit of stuff that you've already learned in these first few lessons of this course, and there's so much more to come. So I'll see you in the next lessons where we'll start to have a little bit more fun. 15. Use Built-In iMovie Transitions: Okay, so now in this lesson, I'm going to be walking you through one of the more fun things that we can do in editing, and that's transitions. So adding transitions within our movies can easily bring them to life, but on the other hand, it can also easily kill them. Okay, now, that's a little dramatic, but let me explain. There's many transitions that we can just go ahead and add Willy Nilly in our projects, and it'll just make it look cheap and not a very nice quality. So when using transitions, we have to be mindful of the ones that we use. But for example, I don't want to see any of you using a flip page transition. These ones, I'll not change my mind on. They suck in every single situation. Now, you might be wondering, what is he even talking about? Well, let's actually hop into I Movie, and I'll actually start explaining transitions and how we can use them. So now we're here within our project. First thing that we're going to want to do is come up here in this top left tab and come up to transitions. So here we have now entered our default preset transitions within Imovie. So as you can see, there is quite a big selection of them. So within EMVe, we have 24 default transitions that are available to us. So looking at them, what we're able to do is to scroll over them and get previews of each one. So this first one here, cross dissolve. Looking at it, if I put my mouse over, we get to see the kind of thing that happens within this transition. So this brown footage here is the first clip, the clip that the transition will be starting from, and the blue clip is where it's going to be ending up. So this is how the cross dissolve looks like. We can go ahead and look at a cross blur. Let's look at the wipe transitions. Wipe. Wiped down. This mosaic one is pretty interesting. Finally, last one I want to show you is the one that we are not going to use. And this is going to be the page curl. Hey, you know, that might be your thing. You might really like it in your movies, but in this master class, I am not going to be including the page curl by any means. Okay, so how do we actually apply any of these transitions into our project? So, let's go ahead and choose one. You know, I think this doorway can be used as, like, kind of ending. So it's going to be the last transition that we'll have in this project, which will transition to our end frame. So as you can see, all I did was select this and drag it, and I can place it right in between the footage. So right in between these two clips, I have this transition. So now what I can do is hit Play. Let's look at that again. And it's a little laggy. So I'm going to slow it up just a bit by hovering over it so we can see what's happening. So we see that first clip, then move into the second one. Okay, so that one was easy enough. There we go. Now it's loaded properly, and we get to see an action there. So what I did with these clips here in the beginning was kind of like a makeshift transition. So I'm just using these clips, kind of just going in and out to then create this kind of transitionary effect. But right now, this is just a little jolti. And depending on the effect, maybe that's what you want. But with this specific one, I want to make it a little bit more smooth. So the way I can do that is to add a fade transition. Now, for a fade transition, I'm going to zoom in here. We actually don't even need to use this transition tab because all we have to do is hover over this clip, and what we can do is drag it, and then it will fade from the beginning and end. So now let's take a look at how this looks if I apply the same kind of fade to each one of these clips. So there we go. I think that looks a tad bit better. What I would do here is to decrease it a little bit more just to get it in my liking. Now let's review these again. All right. There we go. So let me back out and I'll show you another thing. So we have this transition that we applied to this in between these two clips. So if I want to get rid of this transition, all I have to do is select it, and then I can just click Delete. So now, as you can see, there is no transition between them. Another way that I can add transitions to clips is if I put the transition on top of the clip. So let's look at what happens there. Now let's do a slide transition. I'll do a slide left. So let's preview this. We can see that the original footage is then covered with a transitioning left of the new footage. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to select this piece of footage, and then I'm going to double click this slide left. So as you can see, there's now been two transitions added at the beginning and end of this clip. So now let's look at this real quick and review. There's that and then there's that. So let's look over them a little slower to see what's going on. We have this transition that follows and this one that precedes the clip. Now, we can do what we just did I'm going to hit Undo for now to get rid of these transitions. We can do what we just did for multiple transitions. So as you saw, I had this one selected. So instead, what I could do is now select multiple clips. So I selected these three, and now I'm going to go over to, let's say, a circle open transition. So we see the new piece of footage comes in from the center. So I'm going to double click that. And as you can see, we have now added this transition to every single part of this. And even added here at the end to black out to get to end the movie. So if I want to get rid of that one specifically, say I want the last frame to be of this still picture, what I could do is select it and then hit Delete. So now we have at each point, we have this transition going. Now, what if we want to kind of test different transitions at any point? So what we can do is a mixture of what we've learned earlier in this course. If I select this transition and then make sure my loop playback is on, so that is hitting Command L if it's not on for you, or you can come up here and you can select this right here. Under view, click Loop playback, make sure it's on. And then we can hit the forward slash. So as you can see, this transition is now looping. And what if we are, you know, between two clips and we want to try a different one? Let's say, instead of a circle open, we want a circle close. So all I have to do now that this transition is selected and it's looping, I can just double click on the circle close. So as you see, now it's going from the open to the close. Or if I want to change it, I could do page curl, just kidding, making sure you're paying attention. We're not going to do page curl. Instead, we're going to do puzzle left. So if you want to test anything at any point here, um looping your playback and making sure you're selecting the forward slash is going to be something that's very helpful in being able to do this. Now what I'm going to do is remove these transitions, and I want to show you something specific with this ripple transition. So I'm going to go ahead and apply this ripple transition in between these two. Now that I have this selected, I can go ahead and click forward slash, and it's going to loop for me. So if we now back up a little bit, say, you know, around the middle of this clip, and we ought to hit Play, right now, it hasn't loaded in completely, but we see that this transition, as I'm hovering over the transition, takes 1 second to complete. And this is something that we can actually adjust. Say we want this happening over a longer period. If I double click this, I get to put the duration. So now let's say I want it to go on for 2.5 seconds, and I can click Apply. Now, let's take a look at this. So we now see that took a little bit longer to go ahead and complete. Now, if we had multiple transitions, I'm going to click this again, then what we could do is hit Apply to all. And this would basically make all of the durations of all of our transitions, whatever duration that we set here. Now, what if I want to increase this to, you know, say 6 seconds. We get this error. The clips does not have enough media available to change the length of this transition. So how can I explain this to you in the easiest way? Well, basically, when we apply these transitions, right? And when we're making this duration of this transition, it is taking away footage from our clips. So as you can see here, this clip is 1.3 seconds long. Now, if I delete this transition, we now see increase to 2.5 seconds long. So that means each transition that we use actually takes it takes from the clips for it to be able to actually do these transitions. So this means a few things. First off, if as a part of your transition, you're using clips that the first second or the last second, depending on which side of the transition your clip is on, if that has some meaningful information that you want to keep into it, then you have two options. Either, we are going to extend your footage, the beginning of your footage to give it some leeway for the transition to actually take place, or secondly, maybe a little more simple. You just don't have a transition there at all. Okay. But what if you want to play with this transition, this ripple transition, want to have it to be a little bit more precise in actually getting this transition over because right now, all we can do is kind of adjust this duration. But if we want to get a little bit more specific, we can still do that. And to do that, all we have to do is right click on this transition and then click Show Precision Editor. So here we have now entered the Precision Editor. Now, this is the first time that we're seeing the Precision editor. But as a quick overview, what we're basically looking at here is all the piece of the footage that we could potentially use, but that just isn't in our movie right now. So as you see here, this is the first clip. This is the beginning clip. And we're going to be moving on into this second clip right here. And you can see that this part is lit up, right? It's not dimmed, and then this right part is dimmed, because this is the part that we are not going to be using. This is the part of the clip that is kind of being excluded. But in that, we also are able to use this clip like this non use clip in creating our transition. So if we wanted to extend it, we can. So let's look at this. If I grab this transition, I'm able to move where this transition takes place, right? So I'm going to hit Command Z to take it back to the beginning. Or now to change the duration of the transition, then all I have to do is grab the edge here and I can extend it. But you see, I can only extend it to a certain point because this second piece of footage here, it ends. So I'm not able to use any more of it in the transition. So say I were to have it here, I'm going to exit. I'm going to hit Escape to close the precision editor. Now let's look at how our transition looks. We can see the transition. It essentially ends with the last frame of this movie. So let's go back into the position editor. Now, what if we didn't want that to be the case? What if we wanted to use a little bit more of this movie? So what we could do is grab all this unused area and drag it. So now there's all this space that could be used to extend this transition. So now we have a little bit more to work with here at the end to where the transition doesn't end in the last frame of our movie. So this precision editor is going to be something that we are going to be coming back to. But this was kind of a quick introduction of how you can use it in creating your transitions. Okay, so now, looking at this last transition, one thing that we could also do to kind of accentuate this transition and make it feel, you know, a little bit more alive we can add a sound effect to it. Now, this one here is a ripple edit. So let's look at it again. So here, it's like a drop of water. That's the kind of thing that it's trying to imitate. So, in order to accompany this transition, what we can do is add a kind of water droplet sound effect. So let's go over here into our audio and video, and right here, we see that we have water drops. So to find this for yourself, you can just type in water, and we have right here some cave water drops. So I'm going to go through and listen and see which water droplet I think best fits. I'm going to go ahead and use this middle one because this is the one that kind of drags on the longest. So what I can do is put my playhead right here, select O on my keyboard to select an out point. And then right before it, I can select I to set an in point. And then I can just grab it and drag it down right here. Now, you see how that entire clip, which is about a few seconds long, we can barely see it here. This is because we have to enter back into our precision editor because this entire space right here, although it looks like nothing is actually 6.8 seconds. And this one right here next to it, although it looks like a lot, is only 0.7 seconds. So let's go ahead and right click here and click Show Precision Editor. So I can move over here, and now I can scroll down to get to my cave water drops. So right now, this clip, this transition is way too long. I don't actually need it to be this long. And I want to shorten it to say just about the duration of this sound effect. So I'm going to go ahead and drag this up so I have a little bit more to see and work with here. So I can now drag this over, and we have to look at the audio signatures here. So although this is the beginning of the clip, if we're actually looking at the audio signature itself, we see that the audio doesn't start until right about this point. So that's what I'm going to line up with this transition. And because we know the sound effects come very loud, what I'm going to do is decrease the volume on this sound effect to let's say about 20%. So now let's go through and play and listen to it. Okay, there it was actually a little too quiet. So I'm going to turn it back up. Let's say 56%. Let's try now. As you can see there, having this little water droplet kind of helps in making this transition just that much more smooth. And maybe it's the case that you want to add a fade into this audio clip because you don't want to go directly into the silence from the drop into the kind of background noise that we have in this clip. So let's go ahead and do that. That is much better. 16. Adjusting Fade/Dissolve: So within these overlaid pieces of footage or photos or whatever you're working with in these overlay settings, we have different adjustments that we can make to them to make them a little bit more dynamic. With the cutaway, we have the fade. And with our split screen, we have the slide. And with our picture and picture, we have a few different things that we can do. We have our dissolve here, that essentially works the same way as the cutaway in the fade. Let's put a 1 second dissolve, and let's zoom in a little bit to see this in action. So we see how this dissolves like this. If I go to split screen and I increase the slide, we see something that is a little bit more different here. In that we don't see these adjustment knobs at the top. So if I were to play with this adjustment knob, let's choose, let's say, a different piece of footage that is going to be a little bit bigger to work with. So I'm going to go ahead and zoom out, and I'm going to paste in, let's say, a few second duration clip, say, this 9 seconds into our timeline. I'll shorten it up even a little bit more. And I'll put it here in between these two clips. So now, let's look at this. So if I go here into our overlay settings, and let's go back here into picture and picture mode, right? So, within picture and picture, I can make this bigger, and I can play with some of the settings. Let's say this dissolve, I'm going to up it to 1 second. If we zoom in, we can see these adjustment knobs. If I change it to Zoom, those adjustment knobs are now gone. And if I change it to a swap, we also see that these adjustment knobs are now gone, even though we have some time set in here. And although they do present themselves here, these ones are fades. So essentially, what happens is the video fades out and using these. So we can only see this within a dissolve, right? I'm going to up this to 2 seconds where we see it dissolve in the beginning to dissolve in and dissolve at the ending to dissolve out. So essentially, with this dissolve feature, that is when we get these knobs. And the dissolve is here in picture and picture. And it's also here in fade. So fade and dissolve work the same way in which they give us these knobs to work with. Now, what if I want to dissolve only on one edge of the picture, and at the end, I don't want it to dissolve. I just want it to clip in to the next area. Well, what I can do is select option and then grab the knob and move only that knob. So as you can see, I've now got rid of the fade completely on this side, but we still have the fade on this end that is still fading in. And on this end, it clips out. So essentially, what we're able to do is only operate on one end of each clip and only enable or adjust a fade on each side by using option on our keyboards. So now if I pull this down, we see how on the right side here, we got it back because I'm not clicking option right now. But if I release and I go ahead and hold option and then adjust it, we can now take off the fade on this end while maintaining it on this end. And again, this is only able to be done with this fade. Or we can do it with the picture and picture and dissolve. But anything else within our split screen with the slide, we're not able to do it. And with the other adjustments within picture and picture, like the Zoom or swap, we're not able to do it. 17. Create an Advanced Transition: Light Leak: Okay, so I just showed you how we can use transitions within Eye movie to create, you know, some decent looking stuff. But now in this lesson, I want to show you a little hack that we can use to get past, you know, these basic transitions that Eye Movie gives us. And to get into stuff that's looking a little bit more professional. By a little bit more, I mean, a lot more. So, these transitions that Eye Movie gives us are, you know, very basic, and a lot of them are labeled as such. If you see them out and about, if you're just on social media scrolling, you can say, Hey, that one was taken on Eye Movie. And typically, that isn't the best comment. Cause ideally, we want our edits, the projects and movies that we're making on Eye Movie to look like their professional stuff to the naked eye. Now, in order to do this, as I mentioned earlier in the course, we have to do a little bit of finale. So to do this, what we have to do is first exit I movie and get a transition from a place like YouTube. Now, in an earlier lesson, I talked about how we can screen record off YouTube to get some sound effects. Now, we can do the same exact thing to then use as transitions. So you might be a little confused right now, but let me just go ahead and show you how we can do this. But instead of screen recording, I want to show you a tool in this lesson that is going to be very good to have in your toolbox to get anything off of YouTube. Now, I'm going to go in deeper detail about how we can use YouTube to our advantage in making these edits and movies and projects because it is really an invaluable resource to us. But a tool that we can have that can make this process easier pulling from YouTube and putting straight into our projects and I movie is to have a YouTube downloader installed on our computer. So what's a YouTube downloader? Well, a YouTube downloader is basically a software that you put in the link of a YouTube video that you want to download, put that into the software, and then it gives you that YouTube video downloaded for you to then take the file and put wherever you want. Now, the software I use is called stasherdti. So right here, if you go up and type staser dot IO, hit Enter. I'll take you here to their website. And no matter what you have, you're able to download something, download a software to then put on your computer, and then download from YouTube. So right here, I already have it downloaded right here. So now I'm going to go on YouTube and we're going to grab a transition that we are then going to download to then put into our iMovie. So moving over here, I'm going to get into YouTube. And the transition that we are going to work with today is going to be a Light leak transition. So I'm going to go ahead and type in Light leak transition. So we're going to scroll down a little bit, and this is one that I've used before, so I'm just going to go ahead and click on this video, and I'm going to grab the link, copy, and move into Ssher to where I can now paste it. So then it'll just take a few minutes, maybe seconds to download. So now that it's finished downloading, all we have to do is click this for it to take us to its file location. So I click it and we can see right here, we have the free Light leak transition pack, and I have my eye movie in the next frame over so I can just drag and drop it here into my project. So now, looking at this in our project, we see that, you know, this light leak transition, whatever I just downloaded, looks like a whole lot of black and just, you know, some crazy stuff going. So let me show you how we can actually turn this into a usable transition. Well, first off, the first step of this is going to be grabbing a specific part of this that we actually want to use as the transition. So I'm going to go over this and I'm going to choose whichever part I think works best. Honestly, I like this first transition the best. So we see it ends right about here. I'm going to click O to select outpoint. And then I'm going to right click here and I'm going to click Trim selection, so I get rid of all of that excess. And now I just want to use this part. So we can actually listen to this, as well. So I have my loop playback on right now. I'm going to turn that off so that doesn't happen again. Command L to turn that loop playback off so it doesn't restart. So now I have this kind of flash. And as we see, at this point, the entire the entire screen is now covered with whatever is happening here with a light leak. So this is where the transitionary point happens. So what I'm going to do is something new that I haven't shown you yet in this course, is I'm going to click at this point. So this now I have selected a marker. If you can look closely here, you see this blue little marker, and I have now created a marker, and I'm telling myself that this is where the transition is going to happen. So this is where I need to line up to two clips to have that separation point. So now if I zoom out a bit, I can decide where is that I want this transition to happen. And I think a good space for this because this first one, we already kind of have a transition going there. I think the best space for it would be between here, being in Times Square and being in Central Park. What I'm going to do is I'm going to grab this footage, select the entire thing, and I'm going to layer it on top and put it in between these two clips. Okay. So, right here, we have now done this, and now I'm going to zoom in so we can see a little bit more of what's happening here. So so to ensure that this marker is actually lined up with this transition point between these two clips, I want to open the precision editor to make this as precise as possible. So all I have to do is hit Command and then forward slash, and now I'm in the precision editor. So now I can grab this to make sure the point is as precise as possible. And here, it just about is. So as we can see as I click this button right here, Ooh, I'm going to hit Undo. As I click this button, we see that this transition point is lined up just about perfectly with my marker. So now I can exit this and I can come back to work with this. So how does it look right now? Right now, it doesn't look very good because, you know, there's a whole lot of black. We go from this time square image to black to then this light leak and then back to black again, then to the central park footage. So now to fix this, all we have to do is select this piece of footage, and then now we're going to come over here to the overlay. So we're going to click View Overlay settings. And from View Olay settings, we're going to come over here to cut away, click this drop down, and then go to Green Blu screen. So let's move this to a point right here. So now we see that this is looking all messed up. So what we want to do is we want to fix this. So what I'm going to do is select this eraser. And I'm going to select all the points that need to be erased from this. And I'm going to increase so as I selected the points and increase the softness, we see that was once black. Let me decrease the softness here. We can see part of it coming in is now all gone, and all that's left is our transition. So let's look at this here from the beginning. Now we see a much cleaner transition. So I'm going to go ahead and turn this off. I'm going to reset the overlay settings, and I'm going to do it again with you one more time. So we see there that wasn't smooth at all. All of the transition happened within this kind of black space. So again, to do this, we're going to select the clip and make sure we are here in overlay settings. So again, right here, video overlay settings, select, and we want to go to the green blue screen. So right now we see just with the basic selection, it's not that terrible in the beginning, but we see here at the very beginning, and here at the very end, it's still black. So I'm going to select this black area at the end, and I'm going to come up here and select this eraser. And then all I'm going to do is select here. So now it just clean that entire part up. Now I'm going to go back to the beginning and do the same right here and click again, here and here and here, just so we can continue to erase all this stuff that we don't want in it. And as a kind of hack to do this, all we have to do is increase the softness and then it will kind of do all the cleaning up for us in that matter. So if we go through and watch this, we see it's much smoother. So that is basically a quick overview of how you're able to use YouTube to then pull in and make transitions. Now, as we saw with this overlay setting, we're going to come back here and go much deeper into these overlays. But what was selected here was a green and blue screen. So what we were able to do in it is take out the black that was in this transition. It's ideal when doing this method that I just taught you, if you're going to be downloading from YouTube or any other source, say In vado or wherever else that you can get assets from, it's going to be best to be getting your assets with some kind of, you know, neon green, neon blue background to make this overlay, getting rid of this color, getting rid of this background, to be a little bit, you know, more effective and something that's going to be more clean around the edge. 18. Create an Advanced Transition: Cloud Pass: In the last lesson, I showed you how we can use YouTube and some overlay settings to create some upgraded kind of transitions in eye. Now, in this lesson, I want to build upon that and show you another use of this and another transition. So in terms of using YouTube to get these transitions, we have really an endless amount of possibilities. And I could really spend an entire course dedicated all to all the kinds of cool transitions that we could get from YouTube. But we have so much more to cover in this course to make you a professional editor. So, for time's sake, I'm going to show you just one more right now in this lesson, and I can also show you how we can tweak it to make it work a little better. So now we're here back in Eye Movie. So as you can see, right here, I added this new kind of transition, and it's a cloud transition. We see that it has a green background. So again, if you didn't see last lesson, the way that we can get something like this is hop over onto YouTube and type in whatever you want, whatever kind of transition that you could imagine is probably here with some green screen background. So here we have so many different ones that we could choose. There's even this playlist of 45 videos. And again, whichever one you decide, you can just copy the link and then move into a YouTube downloader like Ssher. So this transition, I'm going to have in our resources, so you can try this along with me in your own project. So, if we're looking at this, we see that this clip is 20 seconds long. Let's actually drag and drop it into our timeline. And now let's play it from here. We can see that this is a very, very slow moving transition. And by the time it's done, like, our movies over. Well, the very first thing that we're going to have to do in dealing with this is to get rid of this green screen background. So the way we do this is come up here into the overlay settings, and then you are going to want to select this drop down menu and green blue screen. So as you saw, we didn't have to do anything there, and it took away the green screen. So now, if we're overlaying this, we're seeing just the clouds moving over the screen. Okay, so as we can see right now, like I said before, this is moving super duper slow. So what we want to do is we want to speed this up to actually have this be a transition between two clips and not a whole movie in itself. So the way we can do this is if we select this clip, we can now come back up here. Now, instead of being in the overlay settings, we're going to come over here into speed. So we can adjust this speed to make it kind of whatever we want here. So we can do a custom kind of speed or we can go with their presets. I'm going to go ahead and do four x speed, and we can place this transition in replacing this drop transition. So I can drag it and drop it on top of you. Now let's look at how this looks. Okay. So one thing to notice here is that when we hit Play and the transition begins, these clouds just kind of pop up onto our screen. Now, obviously, that is an abrupt visual thing that we want to adjust. So the way that we can do this is, as before I showed you, we can add a fade transition to the beginning of this transition. So transitions on top of transitions. So to do this, we just grab here at the top, and we can start a fade, let's say, about this long. Now let's watch. I could honestly even extend this further to make it that much more smooth. Alright, let's see it one more time. So there you go. This little pro transition that we just added super simple and really gives us a nice transition between the kind of image of being within the city and the hustle and bustle of that then the clouds which are, you know, coming and moving into the water scene from the city from afar. 19. Use Built-In iMovie Titles: Now looking at this project, there's a lot of things that we see and a lot of things that are done well, but there's no text. So say we're making this project for our New York trip, and we want to have that clear from the beginning, and we want to have a title that says that. So let's go up to a tab that we've yet to explore, and that's up here, right next to audio and video, we have titles. So looking through, Eye Movie gives us a whole bunch of titles to use and really explore. There's so much that they have here. Almost everything is animated in some way, but, you know, we do have a relative amount of creative freedom in when we're going to be using these. If we look over each one of these, we're able to preview what happens. And some of them are centered titles. Other ones are some thirds. So they have lower thirds, they have upper thirds. And then we also have things like scrolling credits. Just all different kinds of designs in these. We even have different colors that we can use, and almost on all of these, we're able to edit the colors, so they don't just have to be white, they could be whatever. We even have some down here that have some extra effects, almost transition like. And my personal favorite, we have the Star Wars, a far, far away kind of template of title. And we're going to be going through how we can do actual Star Wars like end screen or beginning screen. In the next lesson. But for now, I want to give you all the ways that we can use these titles. So, let's go ahead and use this beginning one here, split. So, to be able to add it to our movie, all we have to do is drag and drop it at any point. So, now that I've dropped it here, I'm able to do a few things. First, let's take a look at how it looks right now. Alright. So I can extend this title, so I can make it last longer. Let's look at this. So as we see, it's going to be going over this right here. Conversely, I can shorten it, and then we'll see it drop down here. For now, I'm going to have this extended. And let's click on this to see what we can do. So all I have to do is click right here and we get to be able to edit this. Now because I don't need any of this for now, I'm going to close it with this top button here. All right. So now here I can type whatever I want. And I'm going to just name it what we have the project name as New York trip. Okay. So now let's take a look at how this looks. Okay. So, what can we do to kind of change up to, you know, make it more to our liking? So what we can first do is change the font. For me, I would prefer this to be bigger. So let's see how we can make this. So 300 right now is the biggest that kind of the default options gives us. But if you do want to make it bigger, all you have to do is come up here and actually type whatever number you want. Let's say 500. That doesn't make it any bigger. Let's say 600. There you see. I don't need it to be that big personally. So I'm going to just go back to 300. So now let's take a look at how this looks. York trip. And as you can see, this title has a natural fade out at the bottom, so we don't have to add any kind of transition to it. Some other things that we can do, if we click it, we're able to change the justification on it, so we can have it right, left, center, or spread across the entire screen. Another thing we can do here is change the color of it. So let's say I wanted to make this something that would contrast with the blue and the sea and the sky. I'll select a red, red for Big Apple. Let's go ahead and click out of this. And now, we see this. And I can go ahead and click Command Z to put it back to the white. Let's see how this would look with some black text. Just go ahead and do it like this. So we see right there at the end with this subway, the black text doesn't work. So I'm going to hit Command Z and go back to our white text. Okay, now, let's go back here into our font view. Now, if we want to change the font of this title, then we're able to do that, as well. So let's go ahead, select this. We can change it to anything we want. Say we don't like Druke medium, we can change it to Avenue next. And then, of course, if I were to actually use this, I'd want to decrease the font size, but I'm going to go ahead and stick with the Druke medium because that was my favorite. Now, say I want a different title, and I'm looking through, and I like this prism title. Well, what I'm able to do to kind of decrease the work that I'm doing is I can select my original title and find whichever one I like. Let's say it's this prism one right here. All I have to do is double click this prism, and now you can see that it was replaced. It kept the text in my original title, but it just replaced it. So I'm going to go ahead and command Z this. And this can be the case with whatever kind of title you choose. So if this is going to be a multi line title, say I'm replacing it with this one right here, if I double click it, we get to see that it replaced the first line of this one because this one has three lines, and our original one, let's go back to it, is only one line. So it's going to replace that. Now, if I were now if I were to have this one in the standard title, and I had, let's say, 2025 on the first line, and then New York trip, and then my name at the bottom, Adam Taylor. What I would then happen if I tried to substitute this New York trip, it would only replace the top line. So basically, what would happen is then I put this title along like whatever I created here with the standard, which would say 2025 New York trip, then what would populate in this split title would just be 2025 because it's what I had on the top line. And you don't only have to put these titles on top of footage. Let's look at what I can do. I can grab this New York trip. And I can drag it to be behind my opening piece of footage. So here, it stands alone. But I don't prefer it to be like that, so I'm going to come back and put it here at the top. So now it goes across this. Alright, so now let's take a look at another kind of title. We can go ahead and put some credits here at the end, and we can make them even overlap with this cloud transition. We're able to see as this one is fading off, we get our credits coming in. Now, to edit this, it's going to be the same way as we edited the prior one. We just have to select on the screen, wherever, and we're able to change it. So if I use my arrow buttons, then I'm able to navigate on this. So as you can see, I'm right here at the top at title, and if I want to get all the way down to the bottom and edit there, I can just keep hitting this down arrow. It's a little difficult to see right now because it's a dark background, and my cursor isn't, you know, very bright here. But as you can see, it's right there. So I can type in here New York trip, and I'll put in my name as director. And I'll also put my name as professional editor. Oh, yeah. What else more do we need? So, let's go ahead and look at this, and it's coming up. A. And now we also have these lower third ones that I do want to show you as well. So we can go ahead and drop these. Let's say I'm gonna be putting it right here. And I can yet again extend this so it lasts the entire duration of this clip. Now, personally, would I ever use a lower third one that looks like this? Probably not. But for example sake, I'm going to go ahead and put Central Park Lake so we can take a look at it. See, it's animated. And I can also select this one and double click Clouds. So we have these that pop up, and I can also do this one, softbr. So it just comes in. Very simple and clean. Now, like I showed you before, we're able to go in and edit some things here. We can edit the color. We can edit the justification. We can edit the font. But when it comes to the movement of this, there's not too much freedom that, you know, we are afforded in here. For the most part, if something has an animation, then we have to stick to it. We can't edit the animations. So that means that when we're putting text on our movie, we are only afforded what is here. And for the most part, almost everything has some kind of transition to it. One of the ones that is the most simple, I would say, is this one right here. It has, like, a little bit of a fade in the beginning, but for the most part, we don't really have anything that is going to be, you know, basic texts that's still. And when it comes to all of the other kind of graphics and transitions that are going to be put within these texts, you know, we don't have much freedom in editing them. So that means to get a little bit more creative and have a little bit more freedom in what we're going to be putting on our movie, we have to go look somewhere else. So in the next lesson, I'll walk you through how we can have some upgraded titles, and upgraded text on our movies through using Canva. 20. Create Advanced Titles with Canva (Free): Alright, so in the last lesson, I walked you through how we can use the titles, and I introduce you to everything that we can use within E Movie in terms of the titles. Now, in this lesson, I want to take it up a notch and show you how we can upgrade the text that we use within our E Movie. And that's going to be through Canva. So Canva is just a creative platform, and they have a lot of templates there that are made by people that use the platform, and there's just so much creativity and so much customization that we can make in text and graphics and edits in general on Canva. In this lesson, I want to show you how quick we can just go ahead, hop on Canva and pull something that we like to then put into our e movie. So the very first step is to actually get on cmva.com. So, we're now here on Canva. If you don't have an account, then it's super easy for you to go ahead and make one. Now, when you're here, you should go over to templates. That's where we're going to be working right now in the first part of this lesson, at least. So here, I think the thing that's going to be, you know, most conducive to working within our eye movie is going to be pulling something from a presentation style. Because this is going to be fitting the aspect ratio of our movie. Now we're looking through here and we can get, you know, some ideas of how these are going to look. Some of them have some animations to them, as you can see, and others don't. Others are simple. So the way that we can work with these is essentially choose whatever thing we like, whatever design we like, and edit it within Canva. So if we want to change the text to say, I'll choose this one and put New York trip here, then I can just download it and kind of use it as other footage. So what do I mean by that? Let's actually go ahead and try this so I make it clear to you. So let's go ahead and customize this template. So now we are here within this template. It says Creative Brief. Obviously, I want to change that, and I'm just going to put New York trip. Now, we see that this doesn't fit, so I'm just going to go ahead and drag this out to make it a little bit wider. And I'm going to backspace here to put this on a separate line. So let's go ahead and extend this. And then I can just grab it and move it. So this is already one thing that we don't get to have eye movie. We're not able to move our text freely. It has to stay in the exact position that, you know, we put it in. Oh, we have this right here, this New York trip title. Now, I can go ahead and change whatever I want here. I can get rid of these two. I can put, let's say, February 2025. And I'll get rid of this. I can maybe center this one, and I can go ahead and just delete this top line right here. So, there is so much customization that can be done in Campa. And like other things that I discussed here, this can be its own course in itself. But we don't have to go ahead and dedicate all this time to Canva. I just wanted to show you this as an intro to see what's possible. So let me go ahead and move this up a little and kind of just format this to a little bit more of my liking, and then we can go ahead and put it into our eye movie. So I can select all of this, and similar to Canva, I can change the justification and align it center. So now I can pull it up a little bit. Personally, I like this intro right here. As you can see, there's so much in here because what we pulled was a presentation. We pulled the presentation template. And we don't need all of this. All we need is this first bit right here, this first page. So how can I get rid of and export this first page? So, all I have to do is come up here to share, and then I can download, and now it's going to tell me what pages do I want. I'm going to select right here current page. So I'll hit Done. And as we see right here, there's limited media playback. So that means that the animation that we saw in the beginning when we were previewing this one right here, it won't be exported if I do it as a PDF standard, but we want to have this animation. So I'm going to go ahead and do it as an MP four video, and now I can just click Download. So it only takes a few seconds to actually download, and then we can pull it into our I movie. So as we can see, it's now downloaded orange and black minimalist creative brief presentation. So to drag this in to my eye movie, all I have to do is do just that, drag it in, and I can drop it into my media right here. So now let's look at it. We can preview, and we see it has all of this animation that we didn't even have to put in. It was automatically there for us. So let's go ahead and drag this here to be in the start of our movie. Let's take a look at this. So personally, I like this intro quite a bit better than this one right here. So I'm going to go ahead and delete this one. But this one does go on for quite a while. So I can go ahead and shorten this one, let's say, two, 2.5 seconds. Okay, so now that that is there, what I want to do is also shorten this intro clip. So, now that's shortened, let's now look at this. Okay, so we have this in. But right here, this transitionary point, I want to add something there. And instead of using the transitions right here with an eye movie, I think one that would work quite well with this one, given the color would be our light leak transition that we did earlier. So all I have to do is select here, copy, and then I can go ahead and paste it right here. So let's drag this over for it to fit that much better. And now we have our transition to start to end. So now let's go back in Canva to look at a few more things. So if I don't want that animation that was played, all I have to do is select here and select this animation, and I can just toggle it off. I can remove the animation. But what's a little bit more interesting is that we have all of these customization that we can do. So there's so much freedom that we have here. Now, what if you want to pull in some text because eye movie doesn't have the font that you want, or it doesn't have the animation that you want. And you want to just have this text at some random part of your movie. Well, we're able to work with this, and we're able to integrate this in our eye movie in another way that they probably did not intend. But given our expertise, we have our workarounds and being able to do this. So, let's say that we want just this text, this text with the animation that it has right now. So what we are able to do in this, all we have to do is get rid of this background. Okay. Now it looks like I just deleted everything, but that's not the case because all of this text that we have here is white. And if I and if I select it, we can see that all the elements from before are still here. Or another thing that I can do is change the background color to let's say green. So we can still see everything that's here. Now, there's two options that we can go ahead and continue with and making this text just appear on our eye movie at any point without a background. The first one is as you see here, I have this background color set. So I this background color as a green. So like we did in the transition in those advanced transition videos with the light leak and the clouds transition, all we can do is put it in there, and then we can get rid of this green screen. But oftentimes that leaves some parts that we don't want to have. It's not as clean as we can make it. So instead, what we can do is come up here and share. So what we can do is instead, we can select this entire image right here. We can copy it, then come here into file. Create new design, and then I'll go ahead and just put in the width of our I movie, which is going to be 1080 by 1920. So I'm going to put in 1920 for the height and 1080. So I can go ahead and click create new design. And now we are here. So all I have to do is now hit paste. And now, even though it's white, we can see if we change this background color right here, we see that our text is still there. So I'm going to go ahead and keep it here as black. Now we're going to come over to share. Now click Download, and we can save it with a transparent background. So, now this background is black, but when we save it, it's going to go transparent. So let's go ahead and click Download. So as we can see right here, this is now a transparent background. Even though this looks like it's black or gray, this is just the background of the preview window. But actually, it only consists of this part right here. So I'm going to go ahead and drag this in. So I'm going to go ahead and drag this in to our media. So now we see this New York trip, and it looks like potentially it could just have a black background. But we can see if I am to put it right here. Let's shorten this, and I'll drag it here to the beginning. We see that we have now transparent text that we have added to our footage. So right now it has this kind of effect going on here. And I'll tell you a little bit more about this, but this is called the Ken Burns effect. For now, I'm just going to have it set to fit so we can have it static New York trip. Now, as we can see, this one here doesn't have any animation to it. So let's go back into Canva and see how we can actually add this to our footage with some animation to it. So, first off, I'm going to go ahead and delete this, and now we're going to go back into Canva. So if we select up here, right, if we're just selecting the background, we can select animate. And what this does is animate everything that's on the page. So we have all these different kinds of animations that we can work with. So what I personally like here, I like this flickery neon thing. So I'm going to go ahead and select this one. Now, as I said before, what we could also do is change this background color to something that is going to be very distinct and very easy to take away. So, and what I'm talking about is having a green screen. So I'm going to go ahead and just select, like a neon green right about here, and I can share Download. I have it as an MP four video because the animation is like a video, so I'm going to go ahead and download it like this. So now we have this video. So what we can do is come here just as before, grab the design and put it into our media. So let's go ahead and now drag it, and I'll put it over here. So if I just adjust it to line up, we now see that this covers completely the footage below, the clip below. So what we have to do is click here, come up here to overlay settings, and then go green blue screen. So as we can see, this has now took that off, but it has retained our animation. So let's go ahead and look at this, and I'll put this in full screen so we can view it a little better. You Okay, here, it's a little laggy. So let's go through again to see how it flickers in, like the neon, it's supposed to. But as you can see, some of the elements from the original one, we see that this white line up here is super duperfaded and the February 2025 at the bottom is also very faded. If we look at this first one here, let's replace this footage. We can see that the lines there are much more prominent. And that's as I was telling you in the beginning of the lesson. When we're doing this green screen work with very thin elements, it's not going to be the cleanest of work. So if you're going to be using a green screen, using Canva to add some animated text or animated anything, you want to make sure that there are prominent parts that you want to keep within the footage. So very thin aspects and small parts, you really can't count on too much and keeping it. Now, there you have it. There was your quick overview of Canva and how we can use Canva to get upgraded titles and upgraded text within our eye Movie project. And the limits for Canva are really endless in terms of helping us and being in our toolbox for using it in eye movie. So it's not the last time that you're going to see Canva within this course. 21. Add Picture-in-Picture Effects: So in this lesson, we're going to be going over a strategy and eye movie that depending on the kind of edits that you are going to be doing and the kind of projects you're making, might be something that is absolutely integral. And the reason I'm saying this is because what we're going to be going over today is one of the main things that I was using Eye Movie for when I first started that is using Eye Movie to do picture in picture mode. What's Picture in Picture mode? Well, it's what I am right now. Now I'm sitting in the top right of your screen, and you see Eye movie in front of you. So this can be extremely helpful if you're going to be creating YouTube videos or if you're going to be creating lessons here on you to me, stuff like walk throughs. Now, picture in picture is something that we use within this course. So there's no better way for me to show you how we can use picture and picture and how we can do it than doing it on one lesson of mine. And that's going to be our title lesson where we are going over how to do advanced titles using Canva. So let's hop into Eye Movie and actually get started. So, right here, I already have the two pieces of media that I need to be selected here. So first, I'm going to go ahead and grab this screen recording. So I'm going to go and just drag this into my project. So this is a minute long, and we're going to have these two clips as well. So, I now have these two pieces of media in this project. Now, as you can see, if we're previewing over this, we see that it's just me and full screen this entire time. And this piece of footage below, we don't see at all. Now, obviously, we want to fix this, and we want to put me in picture and picture mode. So what is that? How do we do? Well, it's actually super easy and super simple. All we have to do is go ahead and select me on this top row and come over here to the overlay settings, click this drop down, and then select picture and picture. Okay. So, here we are. Let's look at this real quick. So, so, personally, I like this extra but as you're going to see. Well, we're in picture and picture mode, but we're not done. I'm not just gonna be sitting here in the kind of middle of everything. What I want to do is put myself lined up with this top left corner to make it, you know, look a little bit more professional here. Okay. So now we are here in the picture and picture mode. So what we're able to do, we can add a shadow to this. Unfortunately, we can't edit too much of what the shadow is like what is happening within the shadow. But if we look at this part, we see a little shadow. Here, I'm not going to have a shadow. I don't think it looks that professional, at least in this context, it's not going to be very helpful. There's some other things that we can do here. We can first have a border here, so essentially what this is going to add, if I exit away from this, we can see it fully. I now have a black border around me, around the picture and picture. Let's go ahead and come back in here and let me change this. Let's change the color to be something that's going to be a little bit more distinct and easy for you to see. Let's go ahead and make it pink. Now I can select this off. And I'm going to select this in the top left so we become full screen. So you see here we have this border added to the picture and picture, and then we can also make it a little bit more thick. Unfortunately, we're not able to actually adjust the thickness anymore than this, but we have a thin border and we have a thick border. But for me, I'm always going to go with no border. So now let's look through this lesson and keep it going for a few seconds. All I have to do is cop here to share. Okay, so as you can see, right here, I'm talking about exporting this. Export, this plus pinch. So all I have to do is co up here. And as you can see, my mouse has now went behind my footage, my picture and picture. And obviously, I don't want this to be the case. I don't want me to be blocking what's going on in the walk through. Then there's no point in a walk through if you can't actually see what's going on. So if I wanted to have myself in this top right corner this entire time, then that's okay. But now I need to move myself. So instead of just moving myself over here where I would remain for the entire video, if I just want to move myself for the second of exporting, then I can do that. So, let me show you how to do that. First, let's see where am I going to actually start this export process and when do I need to move myself? And I? Yeah, with export, this bust inch. So it looks like it's right about there. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to go ahead and hover over this part, and I'm going to hit Command B to cut this footage. So now that this top footage is cut. So in doing that, I actually cut both of these. I cut both the top and the bottom. Here, it won't actually matter if the bottom is cut because I'm not going to be changing anything, so there's not going to be any interruption there. But if I want to revert the cut, I could undo or I could just highlight it. I can highlight it and then come up here to modify. And then I can click Join Clips. So right now, I have a separation. I have a split in these two clips. So now what I can do with this clip, knowing that I want to move myself out of the way, I can grab and drag myself to here. And as you can see, there's little yellow lines here, and these are going to be alignment lines. So basically, it's telling me that I'm now aligned with the top and left part of my frame. So I don't have to, you know, go too far. It tells me, and it kind of clicks into place where the edge of my frame is. So, now let's look at it. How can I get rid of an export Tip speech? So, all I have to do is cap here to share. So, you see, right there, it was that simple. After I made a cut right there, I was then able to drag this without having any interruption in the actual footage. And 1 second, I moved over from the right side of the screen to the left. It was cap here to share. And all of this is done with just creating a split in my clip. So I'm doing something different in each of these two clips, even though time wise, they're coming right after each other, and there's no actual separation in the clips in terms of what I'm saying. So we can go ahead and go a little further here. I can that be. And now, if let's say at this point, I want to put myself back in that original spot, then all I have to do is select this clip, Command B, select this clip, and then move myself back over. Okay, so let's look at this point. Picture. So all I have to do is come up here, just share. And then I can downgrade. Now somebody tell me what page going. So as you saw, I just went from right, left to right, super smooth. And also, other things I can do. If I want to make myself a little smaller because there's a lot on the page and I don't want to kind of block any of it. If there's nowhere for me to move on the screen to not block, I could just make myself smaller, as well. Now, you'll also find times in this course where I'm going to be in picture and picture mode, and then I go full screen. So the way we can do that is actually quite easy. So if we're going to come right here, all we have to do is essentially undo the picture and picture mode. So let's say from this point to this point, I want to be full screen. So all I have to do is make sure it's selected and then come back up here to the picture and picture mode. And then I can just go ahead and select cutaway. So now we'll look at this. What's our presentation. You put the presentation now. We don't need all this. All we need is this first here, the first cat Okay. So there you go. That one was simple as anything. So, there's a couple more things that we can also do in this picture and picture mode. Say that, you know, for whatever reason, maybe we're not doing a walk through, but we're doing something else when we're in this picture and picture mode. And we want to get this thing, our bottom footage, our primary footage to be what's actually in the picture and picture mode. And we want the secondary footage to be full screen. Well, to do that, super simple. We come up here, right now, the default is set to dissolve. All we have to do is come here and select swap. And then this one is now going to swap places and what's going to be in picture and picture. Now, we see two other things that we have here as well. So let's look at Dissolve. So Dissolve right now, we don't see anything going on because we have the second set to zero. Now, if I say increase this to 5 seconds, we can now see that I dissolve in in the beginning with a five second duration, and then I'll dissolve out at the end with as well, a five second duration. And then similarly, we can do Zoom. So basically, the Zoom will go from being normal size. Well, in the beginning, will be smaller and we'll zoom into the frame. In the last seconds, we see that we actually zoom out. So there you go. There was your in depth tutorial on how to do picture in picture and eye movie. 22. Use Green Screen Overlays for Amazing Effects: We're going to do today is work with green screens. Now, if you've been watching this course in chronological order, then you've seen that we've already introduced green screens and working with them in a little bit. But in all of those scenarios, we were using green screens as a kind of advanced technique to get around the limitations that Eye Movie has for us. Now, in this lesson, we're going to take it back to basics and kind of use the green screen tool as a person standing there in front of a green screen and taking that background out to put something different. And to demonstrate this, we're going to be using a clip that you may or may not be familiar with. And that's going to be a clip from the intro lesson to this course. It's gonna be me standing in front of a green screen. So if we look at this that I just dragged into the timeline, there's a few things to point out. First off, this clip was taken vertically. So since it was taken vertically, we see around the video, we have a lot of black space, right? This is because the aspect ratio of this project is set to be landscape. It's set to be 1920 by 1080. And the aspect ratio of this video is the opposite. It's 1080 by 1920. Now, there's two ways that we can go about dealing with this. First off, what we could do is change the aspect ratio of this project. But I'm not going to go ahead and do that for this project. We'll go over how to change aspect ratio later in this course. So, what is the second option that I'm talking about? Well, you might have guessed it. It's going to be to crop this to zoom in so we get to see this video covering as much of the screen as possible. So how do we do that? Well, first off, what we have to do is come up here to the crop setting. So we have to make sure that this clip is selected, and we have to come to the crop, and we're going to click crop to fill. If I do that, some part of me is going to get cut, right? If I have it down to keep my hands in, we see that my head is going to be cut off. And if I drag it up to keep my head in, then my hands are probably going to be cut off as well. So instead, what I'm going to do is drag this out a little bit to make it a little bit bigger. So it includes part of this black space. And as I'll show you later in this lesson, that's not going to be an issue. That is going to go away with the green screen. So I now have this selected, and all I have to do is unselect this crop to see how it looks. So let's skim through this. It works well. It's fine. So let's go ahead and listen to this video and see what I'm saying, so we can go ahead and put in the next footage. But what if you just want to have some fun and say, use this green screen behind me to put on some videos of some cute cats or dogs. That's fine. Okay. So the way that we'll actually work with this in the intro video that you may or may not have seen is going to be a little different than what I'm going to be doing in this lesson. Later in this course, we're going to go much more in depth and actually walking you through how we created the intro lesson. But here, I'm going to do something a little bit different. That's going to serve the purpose of showing the kind of extent of the functionality of the green screen. So what I say here is basically I'm pointing backwards, pointing at this green screen, saying, cute dogs or cute cats. So let's look at this right now. Cta. So first, I'm just pointing to the green screen. Cute cats. Then about right about at this point, I say cute cats. So here I'm going to click M on my keyboard to make a marker. So this is me telling myself that here is where I want something to happen when I point back and say, cute cats, I want to make sure cute cats come behind me. Now, I'm gonna go ahead and hit play. Cute cats. And right about here, I say dogs. So all this point behind me, I wanted to stay as green screen. I don't want to do anything. But here, once we get to this point, I want to have some videos of some cats. And then when we get to this point to this market, I wanted to transition to dogs. So, luckily and easy enough for us, we already have two videos here. One of a super cute kitten, and then another of an equally cute dog. Okay, so I'm going to go ahead and put both of these into our timeline. I'm going to go ahead and zoom out a little bit, and I'm going to layer this video of me on top. So I want to switch these two around because we are going to be having a cat first. And I'm going to shrink these videos way, way down because I'm only going to be needing them for a few seconds each. So now that I've shrink them down, let's actually zoom in to deal with them at a little bit more precise of a scale. Okay, let me zoom out one notch here. So now we can see just about what we're dealing with here. So this area from here, I want to make this one line up, and I want to make this one roughly line up to how much we'll be showing there at the end. Now, where it's before I reference any cats or dogs. And there what I want to do is make a cut. So I'm going to go ahead and bring it down into the primary timeline, and now I'm going to make a cut right there. Okay. So now that that cut has been made, I'm going to put these two videos here at the end and drag this one up to the secondary timeline. So now, to make sure that there wasn't any discontinuity and my speech is not going to be cut off, let's listen to this again. Some videos of some cute cats. Done. Okay, so as we see there, there's no issue. So now the point of this lesson, how do we actually get rid of this green screen? Well, what we have to do is first select this clip, right? Because this clip I'm not going to be doing anything with. So I can select this clip. Then I'm going to come over here to overlay settings and then hit this drop down, select green blue screen. And then, usually, it will just take off this green screen. But here, we see that was not the case. So I'm going to go ahead and hit Reset, select this green blue screen. I'm going to hit race. And now it's actually erasing the correct color, and it's not just erasing me. So, luckily, that was fixed. So now let's look at this. First, I'm going to trim this down to come to this marker playhead. Okay, so cute cats dogs. That's. Okay. So now let's trim this to now line up with the end. But in this video, there's one notable thing. Before the lagginess of it, we see that there is this massive wall that's just right here in the middle of this. So clearly, what we want to do is get rid of this. So how do we do that? Well, this is actually quite simple to do. All we have to do is make sure this is selected. So before when I wanted the green screen to actually target the correct color, what I did was select this eraser and then get rid of that color. But now I want the green screen effect, the green screen targeting to work in a certain area, and I want everything outside that area automatically to be taken off. So what this is called is a mask. So we're going to be applying a mask around the area that we want the green screen effect to be applied, and everything outside of that mask is automatically going to be erased. So what I can do here is grab the top of this mask and drag it down. And as you can see, what I'm doing is cutting off this wall. So, as I'm dragging this off, let's now look back at this. I'm going to exit the overlay setting, so that goes away. That's By Thompson. Okay, so as we can see in this video, we still have part of the wall still in this. So we want to go ahead and fix that. So I'm going to select this again and then come back here into the overlay settings and then drag this blue green screen to cover this a little bit better. Now, let's go back and look at it. That's all. Okay. So now, especially looking at this dog video, we see some odd things. We see some kind of colors that's a little bit lighter here, and then we see it again right here. So this is kind of errors in the green screen. So what we have to do to adjust for this is now come back in to the green screen, and I'm going to select it specifically on this point. And what we can do is come back to our eraser and select these points. And also, here and here. So one thing to notice in this is every time I click right here, we see it transitions to now this part is a little bit worse. So this is because the green screen isn't something that is consistent. If we look back to here, if you could see down here, it's a little bit darker than it is up here. Here it's lighter. So this is going to be natural when working with green screens. So the best remedy to this is really just kind of clicking around and finding the point of the green screen where it kind of works the best. And I think right about here isn't too bad. And then what I can do is grab this softness up here. Is basically saying, how strict is the software going to adhere to getting rid of this color. So how much kind of leeway can we give it? So if we put this softness all the way down, then that's essentially saying, be super strict to the exact color I give you. And if we do it the other way, and we turn it all the way up, we can see how the space is kind of disintegrated there, and now it's a little bit more clear. This is basically telling it to be a little bit more dynamic and give a little leeway about getting rid of the color, you know, that we selected. So it has a broader range of colors that it's now going to get rid of. So this is going to be, you know, when you want to keep in mind, if you're going to be creating a video, make sure your background, if you're going to be using a green screen, blue screen or some other kind of screen, make sure whatever clothing you're wearing is going to be starkly different from whatever background it is that you're using. Because if you're going to be an eye movie, and as we saw, we're going to probably most likely have to do something where this softness is going to be all the way up. So it's going to be attacking colors that aren't going to be exactly the one that you selected. So, in this case, just make sure you're wearing something different than your background. So now let's take a look at this from the beginning. We have some fun and use this green screen behind me to put on some videos of some cute cats or donkey. That's so now, so we can see this a little bit clear. I'm just going to go ahead and export this. So we can see it without any kind of interruptions or any lag. So I'm going to go ahead and come up here to the Share button, click Export file, and I'm going to go ahead and click Next. And then once this is done exporting, I'll open it up to show you. Alright, we have the video exported, and let's look at it. But what if you just want to have some fun and say, use this green screen behind me to pronouncing videos of some cute cats or dose. That so there we have it. There's our green screen video, which, hey, I think is pretty funny. Now, now, this isn't now, we're going to see a lot more of this green screen function throughout this course, because as I was showing you in the transition lessons and the advanced transition lessons, the green screen can enable us to do a lot of things in eye movie to really beef up what we can do. But hey, now, if you have any videos of you or someone else in front of a green screen, you now know how to use Eye Movie like a P and put whatever background there you want. 23. Split Your Screen for Creative Layouts: This lesson, we are back working with cats and dogs. And the way that we're going to be working with these two pieces of footage is overlaying them as split screens. So let's go ahead and get rid of all of this footage of me speaking. So we have these two super cute kittens and puppies. Okay, so to overlay these, I'm going to stack one above the other. Let's make them the same length. And what I can do is select this top one, come up here to overlay, then select this cutaway, this drop down, and then come here to split screen. So right there with just that selection, I'm going to go ahead and extend these two clips so we get a little bit of extra cuteness in here. With these two right next to each other, we have the dog here on the left and the kitten on the right. So we're able to do a few more things with this. So first off, we can change the position. So instead of having the dog on the left and the cat on the right, we can switch it up. Or if we don't want to have a set like this, we can do the drop down and we can select the top. So now we have the doggie on the top. And lastly, we also have the bottom. So one thing that is unfortunate with these is that we're not able to shift them around. We're not able to adjust the cropping on them to make them fit a little better. Like, for example, when I had this set here on the left, if I could have the kitten video just shifted that much more to the side, then that would be a little better. But one thing that we can do to kind of replicate us actually dragging these is coming in and using the crop tool. So if I select this bottom footage, right, because the dog here on the left, it's good. The dog is centered, and I don't have a problem with that. Now, if I come up here to the cat and I click this crop button, right? I'm able to adjust this and make the cat a little bit more centered, so it's not going to be pushed off to the left side of the screen and therefore cut off when it's going to be going in split screen mode. So let's look at this. This is much better. So you see the way that this split screen actually functions is that it takes the center of each video, and it lays them right next to each other. So if we go back to this cat video, we could see originally, if I click Reset here, this cat is off to the left. And now if I come back to here, we see that the cat is also pushed off to the left in the split screen. So if I come here, do this, click crop to fill, drag it to where it's centered. And we also have this kind of this kind of plus right here in the middle to help us in knowing what is the center. Have it centered right there, and it's all good now, perfectly next to each other. So, what else can we do with the split screen? Well, we have a little slide animation that we can have. So I'm going to go ahead and put this at almost 0.5 seconds here and hit play from the beginning. I can hit backward slash to do that, and we get to see what it does. So as we see, I'm going to just go ahead and hit Command L to the loop the play back and then hit backward slash to play it from the beginning. We get to see what's happening here. So in the beginning of the clip, what happens is our dog comes in. It slides into the frame from the left position. And at the end, it slides out of the frame. Also, you know, that left position. Now, if I were to change the position, say, right, the exact same thing is going to happen because this is what is overlaid on top. We have it sliding in from the right and also sliding out from the right. Now, if I change it to the top, you guessed it, it is going to be the exact same thing. Slide in from the top in the beginning and slide out at the end. So just from that, you have a pretty great grasp on how this split screen overlay function works. But what I want to do is I want to exit this project and go back into the New York trip. So in this New York trip, we have these two pieces of footage that are both in Central Park, and they're both showing a lake. Perhaps it's the same lake. I don't know. And what I can do is overlay these two. But if I do do an overlay, let me show you real quick. First, I'm going to get rid of this audio and put it under here where it's going to line up a little bit better with this first one. If I put this on top, I can't really have it infringe here on the overlay because we don't have another layer to work with. We only have two timelines within I movie. I can't have this kind of go ahead and do transition that will then lead directly into the split screen. Because right now, if I were to go ahead and hit this overlay settings up here at the top and do split screen, let's look at how it's going to look right now where it's touched up on the transition. So we see right there, if I just hit the back arrow to go frame by frame, we see there is a second here where we see only that first piece of footage, and then it clicks in to having this split screen. So one way that we could address this is by going ahead and adding the slide that I just talked about. So I can go ahead and put this, let's say, 1 second duration. So if we watch from this point, It looks smooth, at least relatively so and coming in. It doesn't look like anything necessarily wrong happened there. But in my personal opinion, I don't like how this slide looks. I could decrease the duration and make it go a little faster. Let's see how this looks now. But personally, I just don't like that. I would much rather have it to be the case where the split screen is actually just that. It transitions into being solely this split screen. Well, we can't do that if we can't lift this overlay to then go on top of this video. But I have a solution for us. It's another kind of workaround and secret trick that we can use to have, honestly, essentially infinite layers like all of those other editing softwares that you have to pay so much money for so complicated. We can do it quite simply here within I movie, and that's what I'm going to go over in the next lesson. 24. Create Infinite Overlay Effects With This Trick: Okay, so as we've spoken about, one big limitation to eye movie is the fact that we are restricted to just two timelines. We only have two layers that we can really work with here when it comes to using footage. Now, I'd say this is one of the biggest differentiators when it comes to using Emovie versus any of those more expensive and complicated softwares. Having this limitation can really restrict us when it comes to the things that we want to do and the edits we want to create and the movies we want to create. But lucky for I'm here to show you a workaround that can give us an infinite amount of layers and completely avoid this roadblock that we have with Ey Movie. Let's look at this piece of footage right here. We have this section that is then followed by a transition that we added that then goes into this split screen mode. Ideally, if we had infinite layers to work with within Eye Movie, all I do is lift this part up, lift this transition to another timeline, and then extend this piece of footage, this transition plays over the split footage. But unfortunately, we're unable to do that right now. What is this workaround? What are we able to do to get around this? Well, this workaround involves exporting the footage. Essentially, what I'm going to be doing is exporting this piece of split screen footage as one and then importing it back into my project. Now, these two pieces of footage become one and I'm able to then put this transition on the secondary timeline that will cover over the split screen footage. There's a couple ways that I can do this right now. Either, I can go ahead and move this transition out of the way and extend this clip, and then export this entire project and then trim it down to this length. Or alternatively, I can start a new project and then copy these pieces of footage and then put it into a new project and export that one and then bring it back into this project. Now, since I don't really want to do all that trimming, all I'll do is do this second option in terms of grabbing all of this with the audio included, hitting Command C to copy this. Now I'll exit this project, click Create New, so I can come into a new project and then paste this project in. Now all I'll do is extend this piece of audio so it goes on the entire clip. Now I can just come up here to export, click Export File and then go ahead and click Next. Now I'm going to go ahead and save this one and then I'll import it into our original file and then I'll come back to you. Okay, right up here, we see this split screen footage. All I'm now going to do is select all of this footage, including this. I'm going to hit Delete and now I can grab this and drag it into place. Now we can see that we have this entire piece of footage here and if I click Play, we see all of the audio files that I previously had under here are now consolidated into this pieces of footage. Audio section. I not only compress two pieces of footage but the sound effects that I added to them. Now if I wanted to add even more sound effects, maybe say other animals or whatever it may be, I could. I now made myself the space to do so. Okay. But now for the entire purpose of why we created this, let's actually get this transition into place so we can see how this all looks. Let's go ahead and drag this. Let's say right about here and click play. There we go. Now this is so much more smooth. We don't have that 1 second of awkward footage where we had the full screen of one and then it went into the split screen. This is looking much better. Now, this isn't the only scenario that we could use this strategy from the projects that we've worked on throughout this course. Let's now go back to the projects and come to the green screen lesson that we worked on. As we see here, let's go ahead and replay this entire 8 seconds. If you just want to have some fun and say, use this green screen behind me to put on some videos of some cute cats or dogs. That. So as we see here, I put these two separate pieces of footage, this cat and this dog in the frame behind me. But what if in this transitionary point when I say dogs, instead of having the entire piece of footage behind me transition into being one clip of a dog, what if I just wanted to go from the full version of this cat to then a split screen showing the dog as well? Well, in order to do that, I would need to have an extra layer. I would have to have this cat video be the length of the entire green screen video, and then I would have to have this dog video be on top of that one, and then I would have to have me and this green screen be on top of that one. Let's go ahead and revert this back to how it was before. Yet again, there are a few ways that I can go about doing this. Now, what I could do, as I said in the last example is export this entire thing and then trim it to then pull only the piece that I want to have at the end. Or again, I could put this into a new file. But for example sake, I'm going to do the method where I will export this entire section and then trim it just to show you that it's honestly just as easy. But in terms of getting this last section to how we need it, it is going to be a little bit more difficult and a little bit more complicated because we have to think about this extra layer, nope, unintended. This extra layer, not just me, but the layer of the fact that we want to have this line up with the audio because let's listen to this again. As dogs. That's. I say cats to then have this first one, and then I say or dogs, and as I say dogs, this footage is now switching. In this new thing that I want to create, I want to have it when I say dogs to have this footage swipe in and become a split screen. To create the split screen that I want to have to then export and put back into this project and to also keep the continuity that follows with this audio. I can do is right click this clip and then click Detach Audio. Now I can get rid of this top clip of me and I'm able to now layer this one on top. But I'm able to check my work and make sure that it all lines up with this audio that is below. As you see, I've gotten rid of me and the green screen, and I have the audio now below it. Let's go ahead and click this. Four dots. What is this? Okay, what I want to do is have this clip lined up here at the end. I now need to extend this clip to fit the entire way. So to do the split screen, I just select the dog because on top, it is the overlaid footage. Come into here, click this drop down, and then go ahead and click split screen, and I want to have it on the other side and I can go ahead and add a slide animation, let's say, 0.5 seconds. Now let's go ahead and listen back to this. Doxy. See, that one is a little slow. I'm going to make it go a little faster. Let's say 0.3, and now do. I just want to probably extend that just a bit. Now, for dogs. That's fine. There. See, being able to know and have that precision, I wouldn't be able to have if I didn't have this audio here that I detached. Now let us go ahead and export this. I can go up here, click Export File. I'm going to go ahead and click Next and I will name it cats and dogs. Now we're looking up here and we see it is just about done, so I can now come here and to import, come down to my movies because that's where I saved it, and there we go. We have cats and dogs right here. Now we have this new piece of footage right up here. I can go ahead and select it and drag it here into the timeline. All I'm going to do is now drag this here until we see a cat. If we're looking at this, that looks pretty precise now. What I can do is now get rid of this, hit delete, now all I have to do is bring in this new piece of footage or the piece that I deleted from before. Now, to bring in the rest of this clip that we cut out, what I would do is come here to the clip size and I would zoom in. I'm going to zoom in to the most that we can to then be as precise as possible in my selection of this because we see here that this orange part is what is used in the clip. That is this section right here. What I want to do is grab everything after this orange line to get the remainder of this clip. I'm going to go ahead and make this clip size even bigger to get even more precise. As we see there, it clipped in right to the end, so I can just select this and I can select it as an endpoint. Now everything that I haven't used is now selected, I can drag it and drop right here. Okay. Now that we see that we have this piece of footage imported, we see that it's not cropped and it doesn't really look like how this one does. Another option that we can do to actually maintain the same cropping that I have in this clip is instead of doing how I did here and selecting the part that was unused, what I could do instead is come here to the end of this clip and scrub right here to the edge of it and select to create a marker. Right? Then from this point, I can extend past the marker to then get to the end of this clip and now come back to this marker, select it and hit Command B to create a cut. I now have this continuity. Let's look back and play this. Has that's one. So now we can see that this audio matches up with this one, everything is, in fact, aligned. But obviously, we don't want to have these two pieces of audio going at the same time. So what I can go ahead and do is mute either one and doesn't really matter. But for the sake of this one is me talking, I'm just going to go ahead and mute this one just in case there is the minutest amount of discontinuity there. Even if it's 0.1 seconds, it just makes sense to keep the audio on this clip. So now that we have it here, what I have to do is get rid of this green screen and do what I did before. Let's go ahead and do this, select here to the green blue screen. Now to fix it, I come here to this eraser, select there, and now I hit the cleanup button right here. This one is essentially a mask. What I'm able to do is now grab this and get rid of this wall that we have in the clip. Now let me align the end of this clip with the end of here. Let's look back at it. Cue cats or dogs. That's one. Right now it's a little laggy. I'm going to go ahead and export this so we can see a little better. Here we go. What you have some fun and say this green screen behind to put on some videos of some eats or dot. That's there we go. We have this thing that I think works quite well if I do say so myself. Cats. That's fine. Now, if I were to do this again and I was going back and editing this. What I would want to do here is I'd want to keep this image to the end of this clip and I wouldn't want it to come out like this. Now, just for examples purposes, so this doesn't take too long, I'll show you exactly how I would do that. When we exported this, we had it be the case that this clip lasted only the duration of what this final clip would be. We can see it by the end of this fading out and sliding out as the transitions in eye movie do. Now, there's two solutions to this. Number one, I either could have in creating this had what I exported actually be much longer. I didn't have this fade out at the end. Then when I would put it into this clip, I would trim it so it would stay at this image for a little longer. Now, alternatively, what I could do and I'll show you super quickly here is I could change the speed of this clip. So I can make this clip go much slower. I have this image here where there's no movement or there's no movement of sliding, I should say, which would last longer, that would then eventually last till the end of this clip. To do that, all I would have to do is come here, right click. I can click Show Speed Editor, and then I can increase this clip duration. I'm basically making it go slower at any given point. Right now, let's look at it. We see how the dogs came in later. Now I can find, at what point does the dogs come in? The dog is fully in here at this point. I can select this one, click to make a marker, and then listen back to this clip. Dogs. I see right about here, I say dogs. I just have to match up this marker with this playhead. I can just shorten this to write about there because I see on the audio that that is the point where I say dogs. We see it get louder right there. Now let's go ahead and listen back to it. Dogs. And I can shorten this end piece right here. It looks like I would have to slow it down just a little more because at the end it does fade out. But all that would do is coming here, making it just a little bit longer, and then matching up this part again now dots. That's what? We see it ends here on this frame of it being split. There you go. Those were two ways that we can use our export workaround to basically have infinite layers in our project. 25. Add Cutaway Clips to Show Context and Detail: Okay, while we're speaking about overlays, there is one thing that I should mention to you. This is something that we have gone over earlier in this course, and it is really a smaller thing, but because it's in this overlay section, it's something that is still worth mentioning. So what I'm talking about in this section is if we come over here to really any overlaid footage, but here it's already active. If we come here, overlay settings, it is this cutaway option. And this cutaway option is what gives us a fade. So why is it called cutaway? Well, in this section right here, which we are in, which is overlay settings, all of these right here are options that give us something to do with our overlays. And when it comes to the cutaway, what this is is essentially saying it's cut away from the primary timeline. So that means, because it's cutaway, what we're able to do is decrease the opacity, make it completely transparent and therefore completely cut away from the footage, or we can make it fade because all of these have some sort of transition to them, excluding our green blue screen. If we come here into split screen, what we're able to do here is have this slide animation that makes it slide in and at the end of it, slide out. If I click Reset here, if we come here to picture and picture mode, what I'm able to do is put this option right here, which either number one, I can have it dissolve. So basically, in the beginning of the clip, it dissolves in, and at the end, it dissolves out. Or I can have a Zoom or swap to it. Now, if we come to cut away, what we have is the ability to fade, which is essentially the same thing as a dissolve. So actually see what's happening and what we're doing. I'm going to go ahead and increase the Zoom here to the max setting and now come over to look here. So right now, as we can see, if we scrub through here using the arrow keys frame by frame, we see nothing is happening at the edges of these clips, right? So if I wanted to, I can go ahead here and add a fade, let's say, for 0.2 seconds, right? That then makes each of these clips Have a fade like that. Now, this might look familiar to you because if we go ahead and look at the other clips, they already have these fades. But this is the first time in the course that I've talked to you about coming here to do this fade. So why is this? Was I doing some editing off camera? No. If you've been paying attention, the way that I was able to create these fades on these clips before was by grabbing these little balls and dragging them to create these fades. So let's look at these again. Well, these little balls here do the exact same thing as coming over here and working with this fade option. So as you can see here on this primary timeline, we don't have those balls to work with. Because they are overlay settings. So we only have them when we have overlaid footage. So let's zoom out. As we can see here in this transition, we also have the balls in the top corner of these clips to then drag and move around. We do not have them, though, on the primary timeline. But there you have it. This is the last setting of our overlay settings that we have in I movie. But we do still have a couple things to mention in terms of overlays in this course. So I'll see you in the next lesson. 26. Add B-Roll with Pexels (Free): Now we can't speak about overlaying footage and using our secondary timeline without speaking about the most common way that this is done. And that's the use of Broll. But what even is Bro? Well, to understand Bro, we need to understand its alternative, which is a role. Now, these two terms can be used interchangeably with the terms of primary and secondary timeline, as we've been discussing throughout this course. Where A role is our primary timeline, and B role is any footage or graphics that we have on our secondary timeline. So A role works as the primary footage. For example, when I'm talking to you right now, you see me in this camera, and this video is essentially, right now, at least a talking head video. So this footage, when you see me is the Arole. Now, when I look down at my screen and your screen now turns into the eye movie interface, this is what is the B role because it's not only overlaid on the footage of me, but it's also supplementing what I'm talking about. That's essentially what the purpose of B role is. Be B roll is only found and possible through editing. Because anything in a raw video, anything that I create right now, say I were to hold up a whiteboard with some information on it, that's still the A role because it's in this primary footage. But Broll is extremely useful because when I'm talking to you in this video, if it was just that in this entire video, no matter what it is that I'm teaching you, it could get a little boring. So we use B roll to spice things up a little to give it a little bit more entertainment value. But also, on the other hand, it could help us understand and educate because Broll is often understood as simply stock footage, but it's not just that. For example, all of the graphics that you've seen throughout this course and in this lesson, even is Broll. Sometimes these graphics are illustrating what I'm saying, so it's easier for you to comprehend the things that I'm teaching. And other times, it's just there to get a change of visual, a change of pace, something different to keep you entertained and keep you engaged in what I'm teaching. Now, I wanted this course to be more than an I movie walk through. I want this course to be me transferring my editing knowledge onto you by using this I movie software to the max capacity we can. So given that we're already discussing B roll, and one of the most common uses of BRL in practice is stock footage. I want to walk you through one of the best free stock footage softwares that I can give you. The software I'm talking about is pixel. Let's just go ahead and hop right on there, and I can show you how we can use pixels to spice up and upgrade our projects. So pixels is a great platform for many reasons, but it really is my go to for any kind of stock footage or photos. So firstly, everything on this platform is always and consistently super high quality. And secondly, which is just as important, it's the fact that everything on this website is royalty free. So that means that we can use it in our creations. We can use it in our projects that we're creating and post it for money or whatever, and we know that this won't be taken down, say, on YouTube. Nothing will be giving us any copyright strikes or we won't have anyone coming after us. All of this is free to use without any risk. So we have an option here in choosing photos or videos to search for. Now I'm going to go ahead and go with videos, and I'll go ahead and search up New York City. It's already right here. So looking around, we can see this piece of footage right here, which may or may not be familiar to you. Now, if we exit this, we have another piece of footage right here. Now, if we scroll down a little more, we can find this piece of footage. So, it's not clear to you yet. Let's go back into Eye Movie and check this out. All of those pieces of footage I've showed you have been the pieces that we've been working with throughout this course. So I wasn't lying when I told you that this is really my go to platform to getting all these kinds of footage. Now, we're back into the software, and there's a few things that I want to show you within this. So I searched up New York City. Now, I want to show you some filters here because these are going to be super important, and it just makes going through this website a little bit more easier when you're looking for stuff to put into your project. So we have orientations and sizes here. Orientations is the filter that I'm always using. So it depends if I'm going to be editing a video that is supposed to be shown on phone. So, let's say, an ad that is going to be posted on Snapchat or Instagram reels, I will be coming here, and I will make sure to select a vertical orientation because obviously I want something that is going to fit in my iPhone perfectly. Now, when I'm working with you in this course, almost everything that we're doing is going to be in a landscape orientation or horizontal. So when I was searching for footage to use, I always had this horizontal filter selected endless pieces of footage that you can go through and use for your own projects. I've been using pixels for years, and I swear this isn't sponsored, but it is by far the best website for stock footage of videos, photos, just anything. So now let's go ahead and we can stick with this New York City search, but I'm going to go ahead and search photos. So with photos, we see a lot more kind of variation in terms of the aspect ratios. But regardless, we still have these filters that we can apply. And just as it is with videos, with photos, there's so much stuff. So I really like this first photo. So I'm going to do is download and show you how easy it is that we can just put it into our eye Movie project. Okay, so it took just a second to download, and I can come up here, grab this file, drag it, and drop it in, let's say, here, at the end. Though it's vertical, we can do a few things to adjust for this to have it in our eye movie. Right now, we have the default Ken Burns effect, which will go over cropping and what the Ken Burns effect is in a later lesson. But as you saw, super simple and super easy for us to just go ahead and import to put into our project. But if you want to actually see some B role in action, then, you know, besides all the times that it's happened in this lesson and throughout this course, we can go over here back into our projects and come to our green screen. Because when we're working with a movie with, you know, random videos and random photos, there's not really an A role or B role because at the end of the day, like, there's no consistency or continuity in an A role. There's no really primary footage. But if we're looking at this video that we worked with in the green screen lesson and a couple other lessons, this is primary footage. Awesome. Now, an actual example of B roll would be if I dragged this and then put this piece of footage on top. And if we go ahead and look at it, we have everything here, which is the A roll. And this is the B role because, you know, it's supplementing what I'm talking about over here in the primary timeline, which is the A role, I say cute cats, and we see a cat come on the screen. And then I say or dogs, and then we see a dog come into the frame. So there you have it. Now you know all about Broll and Arole and you know a place where you can go ahead and get some great quality Broll for yourself in stock footage and pixels. 27. Use Overlays as Filters to Add Style and Visual Depth: For the final lesson of this section, I want to show you how we can use overlays to kind of enhance our footage. And that's because we can use overlays as kind of frames or filters for the footage that we are going to be working with. So what exactly do I mean by that? Well, I have two overlays right here. That we are going to use on this footage of our super cute dog right here. So in terms of using these overlays to kind of enhance our footage, well, it depends what you're kind of working it with and what you want to create with these overlays. So, right here, I have layered on top of this dog a vintage film overlay. So let me go ahead and cut it to the correct point. And to use this properly as a kind of filter and as a frame for our little doggie over here, all I have to do is come in here, come to the overlay settings, come to the green blue screen. And as we see, it automatically got rid of that green area. And now let's rewatch this. So now instantly, our footage has a completely different feel to it, and that's the power of filters or overlays in general. We can make our footage, which was once, you know, standing by itself, which communicates its own kind of thing to then adding a simple overlay, which now makes it a completely different kind of clip. Now, we have this one, and we also have this one right here that has some text aligned to it. Now, both of these that I'm showing you right now are just like the other lessons going to be in the resources of this lesson. So you're going to have both of these overlays for you to work and add to your own toolbox. So looking at this overlay, it is the exact same thing where to get rid of this green screen and to use it as a proper overlay, we're just going to come over here, select green blue screen, and as you just saw, it got rid of it itself. So this one even has some light flares and some extra graining that goes into it. So it's extra vintage. Now, these two kinds of overlays, obviously, they're both kind of vintage film overlays, where they're going to give your footage old timey kind of look to it. But obviously, this isn't the only kind of filters that we can apply using overlays. So I imported these two pieces to show you how we can have different kinds of overlays that give different kinds of effects to our footage. Oh, this one isn't a green screen, but we can do the same exact thing with it. If we come to overlay settings and then do green blue screen. We can now kind of get rid of this blackness and have it still remain with the glitchy elements. So obviously, this is going to all depend on, you know, the kind of film that you're going to be creating or the kind of edit or little project. But as you can see, there's so many ways that we can use overlays to kind of help us. And just as these two, we're going to be in the resources, these two, as well, will be in our resources for you to use and apply to your own projects if you want. So I'm coming over to this one just to show you real quickly how it's the exact same thing, how we can come over here, select this black and kind of create this little weird, wacky effect right here. Hey, I don't know what you'll be using say, this effect for, but it is available to you, and there's so many ways that we can use overlays to kind of enhance our footage. 28. Use iMovie Backgrounds to Enhance Video: So in this lesson, we are going to be discussing backgrounds. All right, so far in this course, what we have explored, at least here in this top left panel has been media, which is very familiar to us by now. The audio and video section here is where we mostly worked with sound effects. We looked at titles, but now it's time to move on to backgrounds. Backgrounds are actually quite simple. Throughout this course, I've been throwing at you so much stuff, so much knowledge and things for you to actually absorb and get into your editing toolbox. But in this lesson, there's not that much, at least, new things to learn and more of just exploring the possibilities of what we can use with backgrounds. Looking at all of these backgrounds, we're able to preview over them with our mouse to see them kind of move. Some of them are animated, as you can see here from the first couple that we're looking at. But then, as you see here, some of them are still. Well, they're not animated. This one, as you can see, is quite animated. But what we can do with these is we can drag them. Let's say we want to use this organic one to create some kind of pity kind of movie. I can go ahead and get rid of this one that we created using Canva, and now we can be left with this organic background. So backgrounds are mainly going to be useful in using them as intro pieces. So you can create an intro to your project. They can be used as chapter pieces. Maybe if you have a longer project and you want to split it up into chapters, you can use the backgrounds to create titles for each chapter. Then in the same way we can use them as intros, we can also use them as the finales. So we have this background over here. And all the backgrounds, for the most part, are going to be coupled with titles. So let's go ahead and put these scrolling credits over this one and we can look at how it looks right now. So like I said, the backgrounds aren't that complicated, but one thing that eye movie restricts us in is that we don't have too many to use. So as a part of this course, one pillar of it is me giving you some assets that you can use yourself, that I use quite a bit. Along with all of these backgrounds that you can explore yourself, I want to show you the two that I'm giving you. Now, if we move over to our media, I already have them imported under backgrounds. These ones that I'm going to be showing you now are backgrounds that have gotten some popularity online and edits that are going to be on social media. Let me go ahead and trim this selection down to show you. These ones are very dynamic. And can be coupled quite well with whatever titles you want to put on them. I have this one right here. I now am going to replace it with this one right here. Yet again, I'm going to select O here to create a selection and then I'm going to trim the selection. This one is a film grainy background, which I liked and I use quite a bit in my own projects. Now, the final piece of background is actually a vertical background. These three all can couple quite well as backgrounds that are upgraded take it a step further than the ones that we have here, the basic ones in I Movie. Let's look at how we can actually put these backgrounds into action with creating a new title screen for this project. Now, I'm going to go ahead and use this background, even though it's formatted for an iPhone, it's formatted for a vertical, aspect ratio. I can go ahead and make it fit to this one by simply clicking this right here, clicking the actual footage, coming over here into the crop settings, and I can rotate it. So now, it fits this aspect ratio. It fits a horizontal kind of frame. And like any of the backgrounds, what we're able to do is trim the length of these. Now, the backgrounds that I gave you, since they're dynamic and I have them imported, they all have a certain length to them. So if we look at this, this one here is 1 minute. This one here is 1.3 minutes, and this one here is 30 seconds. Now with the eye movie backgrounds, one bonus that they have is that they are essentially endless. So even these animated ones, I can go ahead and grab this and I can select it and drag it out as long as I want. Now, I just wanted to show you that before we get into actually creating this little title screen right here. So we have this. Now I want to add some text to it to make it look a little better here. I'm going to go over here to titles, and my favorite one is personally this split. I think it works quite well with the kind of theme that's going on with this background. I can select it and I can put New York trip here and I can go ahead and increase the font size. So now let's go ahead and look at this by hitting backward slash. All right. So there we have it using a background to create a title screen. 29. Advanced Backgrounds With AI: Okay, earlier in this course, I showed you how we can get a little bit more creative and how we can upgrade our eye Movie projects by going outside of Eye Movie and using other external softwares. So we did this first with Canva and having this graphic here of our New York trip. This is something that we created in just a couple of minutes using Canva that we couldn't do within Eye Movie. Now, I want to take this a now, I want to take this a step further in a different aspect. So here we kind of upgraded Eye movies titles and going into Canta. Now, in this lesson, what I want to show you is upgrading Eye Movies backgrounds using AI softwares. So this is going to be AI Image generators. So Chachi BT and Adobe Firefly are going to be the two ones that we are going to be focused on today in this lesson. So we have ChachiBT here and we have Adobe Firefly here. So now going back into Eye Movie, we see we just went over all of these backgrounds and how we can use them. Now, the only limitation here is the fact that we just don't have that much to choose from. Sure, there are, you know, a good amount with all their, you know, unique qualities to them. But when we're talking about these backgrounds, if we're using AI, our possibilities are honestly just endless. Okay, now, our possibilities are endless. This is true. But one kind of limitation that comes from this from this endless kind of possibilities of things that we can create come a difficulty in kind of articulating what it is that we do want to create. So that's why I'm showing you both ChachiPT and Adobe Firefly, because what I personally like as an image generator better is Adobe Firefly. I like the images that they create and the kind of style that this software works with. But sometimes it's difficult to actually get that exact wording that I want in creating some image. So that's why I use HachiPT here to help me nail down that wording, and I can test it and see what HachiBT creates with its own image generator. But most of the time I do like Adobe Firefly. Okay, so now that we're in this main project and it's a New York project, let's go ahead and create some image that has to do with New York. Let's say what I want to create here is some kind of image of the statue of Liberty, because that's one big part of New York that just isn't in my thing at all. So let's go over, and because this is a simple thing, let's just go type this straight into Adobe firefly and see what it gives us. So I just went ahead and put in a simple prompter photo of the Statue of Liberty from drone. So let's just go ahead and generate and see what we get. So now, here comes our first limitation in Firefly. So in Firefly, if we're ever going to be trying to create images of specific people, say celebrities or specific brands or anything else that has some kind of copyright on it, it's not really going to cooperate and it's not really going to help us in this. So in scenarios like this, this is where it's perfect to go over to Chachi PT and see if it's able to help us. Okay, so I went ahead and typed this same one in. Now let's see what it gives us. All right. So here we go. So this is mainly me showing you the kind of problem solving that we're going to have to be incorporating when we are going to be using these AI softwares and all the limitations that come with them. Now, am I actually going to use this in our project? No, but this is really just to illustrate how we can use each single software for different purposes. Now, let's go back into Firefly, and let's actually create something, put in a prompt that it's able to help us with. Okay, so I went ahead and typed in my prompter. Very simple. Times square at night, and we're going to see what it's going to give us. Now, this, I don't only want to show you how we can create these kind of images, but I also want to give you a walk through of this platform here because Firefly can be super helpful to us. Now, the first thing that I want to point out in doing this is that it gives us these suggestions. So sometimes these suggestions can really be hitting at exactly what we want. Usually, the more we give it, the more kind of helpful these suggestions can be. But if none of these things that we see are helpful and working, we can just refresh to get some new ones. But for now, I'm just going to go ahead and put in this super short prompt. For the most part, if you want to get the best kind of results possible, then you should be putting in something that's a little bit more detailed. So as we see, right here, we have these kind of super long exposued images that this just created, and it's not really Times Square, is it? So, let's try to go ahead and put in New York Skyline at night. Okay, so this one's a little bit better. We have the Empire State Building here. Now, the next thing that I want to do in this is having the aspect ratio be something that fits into my eye movie project. So if we look back here, then we see that everything we have here is in this landscape aspect ratio. So what we can do is come over here. We can either change it to landscape or widescreen. I usually like to do widescreen just because it gives me a little bit more to work with. So now let's click Generate. So when we find ones that we like from the previews, what we're able to do is click Upscale A. And from that, we get to see much more high definition photos of these. And, you know, if you're looking in super duper closely, you know, you could tell it's probably AI. But honestly, from a distance or just a quick part of your project, like, it looks amazing. But now, another thing that we can do over here is come over here to the different kind of styles and effects that we can add to it. So what I like to do, depending on, you know, the kind of scene or image I want to create, I'll most often use these effects right here. So now let's look at this being hyper realistic. Now I can upscale all to get more high quality images of these, and then we can look at these. Now, these do look a little bit better. But they were already quite realistic in the beginning. So now another thing that I like to do is sometimes just lean in to the fact that this is AI. And in doing so, we can add some pretty cool effects. So I'm going to do some digital art in painting here. So we're kind of now veering off of this, like, realistic look, and we want it to be more art style. So this one looks pretty cool. Let's go ahead and upscale and look at it. Now, what we're also able to do is come over here and adjust the strength and intensity of these effects that we're putting on. So right now, I just put these both at MAX, and now we can look at how that kind of affected it. Well, as we can see here, these ones are much more kind of painting art style much more, you know, intense and, you know, strong than the ones before. These ones are kind of, you know, in between some kind of, like, art style looking thing and trying to keep it realistic at the same time. I'm more, a realistic art, but these ones are a little bit less of that, and they're more leaning into the kind of styles that we put in here. That's because we increase the strength and intensity of the styles. Now, depending on the prompt that you're putting in, another very great one to use right here is the camera angle. So this camera angle, we get to do a bunch of different ones. So we have macro photography, photograph through a window, a shallow depth of field, shop from above, shop from below. These ones are great ones to add in. So let's just go ahead and do photograph through a window, a New York skyline at night. Now let's see how this looks. I can select this, and we see that it's still carried over the art style, and it is through a window. This is accurate. So there's a bunch of other things as well. We have the color and tone. We have lighting that you can look through here. And these are all super fun for you to go ahead and use. And they also have reference images. So if I click Browse, we get to look at all of this. And the best part of this is that all of this is free for you to use in any project that you want. And then we also have here, we have art and photo. So if you want to create something that's more realistic, then you're going to click Photo. If you're going to want to create something that looks like it's more creative kind of style, then you should do art here. And we're also able to use the different models. And just because a model is sometimes the most recent, it doesn't mean it's necessarily the best for the specific thing that you're creating. So I also do recommend that sometimes you should go and look at these legacy models and put in your prompts into those as well, just to see the kind of result that you get because oftentimes it's pretty solid. So now, what else are we able to do in this? So let's just go ahead and select this one. Now, what we can do is a few things here. First, we can edit it. And with this, the thing that I tend to do the most is generative fill. So sometimes, if there's, like, a part or an aspect in an image that I don't like, then what I can do is select this remove right here. And then let's say I don't want this building right here, then I can go ahead and do this and then click Remove. And then it's going to generate three separate variations of this being removed. So we can look at them when they load here in a second. Okay. So now we see this is the first variation. This is the second. And third. Now, you could click more for it to generate more if you don't like it, but I think this second one here is kind of good. Compared to what it was before, I'm going to just go ahead. Oh, I clicked the wrong button there. But let's just go ahead and click this again, so it generates some more, and then I'll click Keep for the one that I like. So, again, we see these buttons are much less prolific in their kind of area on the image generated. So I'll just go ahead and choose this one. I'll click Keep. So now we see that it's that. Now, another thing that we can do is expand. So if we want to create something that is going to be in a different aspect ratio, maybe you want it to be just larger in all kind of sense. If you want something that's, you know, more on the area, then you can go ahead and click this, and now let's look at what it's going to generate for us. As we can see, now just become a bigger picture. Now, there's another presets that we have here. That we can work with and making this portrait, it's already basically a landscape and a wide screen. But let's go ahead and test out this portrait. So here's the first variation. This one is the second, and this is the third. And I think the third does the best job of kind of making this into something that it wasn't in the beginning. So I'll just go ahead and click keep there. Now, what if I want to take this and I want to bring it into my project? Then what I can do is click Download right here, and then it'll just download essentially instantaneously. Then we can go over. Now we're back here into the project. And then I'll just go into my downloaded folder. And I can just go ahead and drag this in. So now we see that it cropped to fill, and now it's doing the Ken Burns effect. So let's just go ahead and click Fit to see this full image right here. And it works the same way as any of our backgrounds. So we can change them to be whatever length that we want because they're just an image. So let's go ahead and drag out of here. Now, let me drag this to the end of our movie. And as you can see, I just made it 1 minute long of just this. So from this point, we can do any other thing that we want to do as if it is a photo because it is a photo. So we can change the the ratio of it here, we can crop it to have just the original piece in here. We can change the colors, saturation, and do whatever we want with it. Okay, so now you relatively have a good idea of what Firefly is and how we can use it to create images. Now, let's go ahead and go back into Chachi PT and see how it can help us in prompting something. Okay, so I went ahead and typed in this really quickly. I said, I'm creating an eye movie of my New York trip, and I want to create some AI photos to include in it. What should I try? So it gave me a few different options here. For realistic shots, it gave us Times Square at night, Central Park in Autumn, the Brooklyn Bridge at sunset, aerial shot in Manhattan, and then you're in a cafe in Soho. And then it gave us some cinematic and dreamy shots and some creative or stylized photos. Now, because it's AI and we can essentially create whatever we want, I'm going to go ahead and take this creative or stylized shot of a comic book. So I'm going to go ahead and now talk to Chachi PT and say, I want to create a comic book styled image. Give me a few variations of prompts. A, I'll say, give me a few variation of image ideas, and we can generate the one I like most into a full prompt. So there we go. I said, I want to create a comic book styled image. Give me a few variation of image ideas, and we can generate the one that I like most into a full prompt. So I think these are all great ideas, but I think I'm going to go with this subway showdown. So I'm going to just go ahead and say, Let's go with idea number two, write me a full prompt. So, we went ahead and got this prompt. So now what I'm going to do is copy it. And I'm also going to tell Chachi Buti go ahead and create the image with the prompt you just generated. So now it's going to go ahead and work on that, and we're going to go and move into Adobe firefly. And we can just come here and paste the prompt that it gave us. Now we're just going to click Generate. Now, here was the image that Firefly just created for us. Now, I'm going to change this up just a little bit to get something that's a little bit kind of more distinct. So what I want to do is instead of saying they're going to be sitting alone in a subway car, I'm just going to say they'll be sitting in a subway. Subway station. So just with that little change, let's see what we have now. Now, I'm going to also change the aspect ratio to widescreen, so we can fit it better into our project if we wanted to. And we see there's different styles that are going to be taken on here. Now, we can adjust this with our effects down here, but I want to go ahead and let it have some freedom and what it wants to do. But what I am going to change is this camera angle. So I want this to be kind of a wide angle, something that's a little bit further away. Now let's see what we have. Now, the wide angle as we see didn't really help much. So what I want to do is change the prompt just a little bit. Now, in this situation, I tried to change up the prompt, but didn't really cooperate very well. But if we look back at ChachBT, this could be something that potentially we want to include. At least it was a little bit more accurate to the prompt in this scenario. So if I want to change this to be a aspect ratio, I can fit into my eye movie, then I can just tell it that. So I'm going to say, change the aspect ratio to be 1080 by 1920. So I corrected my aspect ratio and made sure it was actually 1920 by 1080 to make it a landscape. And the same way in Fire fly, where we could just download it and then move over here, we can now grab it here from off screen and my downloads, and I can just drag it in. And then here we go and having it be a full image. So let's go ahead and crop to fill, and now we have this little AI image. And if we want, we could have the Ken Burns effect to add some kind of ominous element to it. Let's say we have it like this, and then our end photo is going to be focusing more on our villain over here. Now let's look at this. So, there we go. There you have it. Here's how we can use AI to give us some advanced backgrounds to work within our projects. And again, just like these backgrounds, we can also use these as secondary things. So instead of being the main image, right, the main focus, we can put text over these, and we can do anything else the same way as we have these backgrounds. 30. Use Animated Maps to Show Travel and Location: Okay, in this lesson, we're going to be going over one of the most fun and kind of odd parts of eye movie, in my opinion, at least. And that's going to be the maps. So this map functionality that we have here is quite interesting. And honestly, it's my favorite part about eye movie because in my opinion, it's so random. Now, now some of you might not know what this map functionality is. Well, let me just go ahead and tell you. So let's go ahead and drag in this old world Globe into our project. Now, what the maps allows us to do is essentially visualize travel from any one part of the globe to another. I can say we're starting at San Francisco. I'll just keep that as is, and I can choose anywhere else in the world. So let's say we are going to Amsterdam in the Netherlands. I can visualize this. Now, let's watch this. We're starting at San Francisco and ending up in Amsterdam. Now, I frankly find this kind of functionality with an eye movie so entertaining because it's so specific and honestly quite good. In terms of other editing softwares, you know, they can have their advantages over eye movie in certain aspects, but I can tell you for sure, none of them can visualize travel as well as eye movie. So let's actually go ahead and integrate this kind of map into this movie that we've been creating here. So it's a New York trip. So what we have to do is obviously we want to set our destination as New York. So we have NYC right here, and, you know, we'll keep the display name NYC. But if we wanted to, we could change it to wherever we want. Even though it's New York up here, the display name can be New York City or anything else that we want. But we can go ahead and set that. And let's say we're traveling all the way from Mumbai in India, and we're coming over here to New York City. Let's look at this. There we go. Now, some extra functionalities of these maps. Well, right now, it's set to a duration of 4 seconds. What we can do is actually extend this. I just made it now 12.4 seconds, and we can play this from the beginning. And we see by extending it, what it does is kind of extend the duration of the dot going from your original city to the end city. And also what we can do is come up here and change the kind of style that we have. But another thing we could do is come right up here and select the style from here. So let's go ahead and select any one of these. I'll do blue marble. Now, let's watch this. All right. And we also have other options here. So we obviously want to show the route in the cities for this project. Otherwise, you know, it's just a spinning globe. So, hey, maybe if you want that in your project, here you go, you could put two random places that don't really matter to then create a spinning globe. But otherwise, I want to have the route in cities and Nabilt. And we can also add clouds to it. So let's go ahead and watch this back now with the clouds. You know, they add a good bit of texture and maybe, you know, some depth to our world. But I am going to check off the clouds. And now let's look at this Zoom in function, which now enables us to look at this travel from a much more zoom in perspective. But hey, I love seeing the stars around, so I'm going to go ahead and keep it like this. Now I'm going to go ahead and shorten this and show you the other kinds of styles that we can work with. Because right now, we have these four. We have old world watercolor, educational and blue marble. But above those, we also have a different format of maps that we can work with because we see right here the four different styles, but they're globes. And here we see maps, also containing these four different styles. And lastly, we have the kind of Mercadian projection of the world here. So we can also use these maps to visualize the transportation. Let's drag this in here and choose any other city right here, Abidjan and Co Devoi, San Francisco, all the way over to Abidjan. So we get that within these maps. But with these ones right here, the Mercado projections, we're not able to visualize any transportation here or any individual cities. These ones have to simply just exist as maps. So if you just want to have a map for whatever reason in your project, then you can select these ones. But I'm going to go ahead and stick with our globe right here because I personally like it. But that's it for this lesson and probably one of the more fun features on IMV. 31. Crop Photos and Adjust Framing: Talk about cropping and adjusting photos with an eye movie. So in the last lesson, we covered the Ken Burns effect, which basically takes a photo and makes it a little bit more dynamic. So we can start at one edge of the photo and move to another part of it or use it to zoom in or do things like that. Now, if I select this photo and come back up here into the cropping settings, I want to show you a few more things besides this Ken Burns effect that we can do. First, I want to show you the fit. The fit essentially, fits the photo to the frame to be able to see the entire photo. So as we can see, this photo was taken portrait style. So because it was taken portrait style and our project is in the aspect ratio of a landscape, it is showing a lot of black space on the right and left. This is because in this crop setting, we set to fit. So in order for it to fit the entire image in this kind of framing, we have to have some black space on the left and right. Now, if I was working with a photo from my iPhone that was taken in portrait mode, and when I import it in here into my project, it is in this portrait orientation, but it doesn't really matter if it's portrait or if it's sideways, like landscape, then what I can do to adjust for this is ensure that the fit is selected, so we see the entire footage. And then all I have to do is come over here and I can turn it in whatever kind of direction I want it to be. Now, another great example to illustrate when this can come in handy, being able to flip the orientation of something, is coming here and if I bring in this piece of video that I use from our backgrounds lesson, this background was made for an iPhone screen. So basically, it's a portrait kind of style the same way that this is. But even though it was made for an iPhone aspect ratio, if we come here into cropping, we can then turn it to now make it useful for this kind of aspect ratio in our project. Okay. But now let's actually go back to this photo right here. So as you see, even though I turned it, you know, we still have these black bars here, right? And if I make it in the correct orientation, we see that the black area right here, this empty area is huge. So what if we want to get rid of that? Well, what we can do is select crop to fill. So now we see that we have this box, and this box represents what we are going to see within our project. So this little box that we see here is the screen and what's actually going to be present when we watch it in our timeline. Honestly, I like how this default crop to fill frame is right here. So I can just go ahead and select here and play. And now this is fit quite well. Let's say I want to make this come lower a bit. So get rid of all this empty space kind of up here. It's just show more of the skyline below. I can just go ahead select this and drag it down, and then now this is what we see. So a few other options I can do in this setting. I can go ahead and adjust this. So now I'm zoomed in much more into this. So let's look at how it looks now. Now, if I hit Command Z to undo it, we see how we went back to before with this kind of full screen view of the photo. And just as with the Ken Burns effect, we can apply this cropping to our footage as well. It doesn't have to just be isolated to our photos. So if I were to come in here to let's say this video, I can click crop to fill and adjust this to say, make it like this. Now, for watching it, we have a much more focused piece of footage that doesn't have, you know, this little bench right here, whatever it is in our. 32. Apply Cinematic Zooms - Ken Burns Effect: Now, if we're looking at the end of this project, we get to see one of the staple effects of eye movie. And as you just saw there, that's going to be the Ken Burns effect. So it's the effect that essentially has this still image and moves it from one point in the beginning to another point at the end. So how do we go ahead and edit this? If we come up here into the crop settings, we have right here the style burns. And as you can see, right here, what's being visualized is what essentially happens when we play this from beginning to end. We see it being completely zoomed out here, focused on this empire state building as the center of the frame. And then as we go in, it zooms in just slightly, but then it moves down lower. So if we come here into our crop settings, we get to see that we're working with this entire image, right? Because this is one still image, and it is taken in a landscape format instead of being horizontal. It's a vertical image. So we see from the left and right, let's say I were to click fit, we get to see that we have all this black area from the left and right. Now, for the most part, we typically don't want to have any of this included in our projects because it doesn't look very nice. It doesn't look very professional and it doesn't make our projects look any better. So when we're going to be editing and we're going to be using this Ken Burns effect, we always want to ensure that our Ken Burns, either our start or end frames are always going to be within our picture and not including any of the black space around it. Because if it were to include this backspace, let's say, for example, I'm going to enlarge this box to include the black, it's going to look like this, right? Here, we're zoomed in, and then as you see, it zooms out a little bit, and we see all this black area, and most of the time, we want to avoid this. So let's go back here into the Ken Burns, and let's talk about what we see here. So we have two different boxes. We have a start box and we have an end box, and connecting the two, we see this yellow arrow. So this yellow arrow is essentially visualizing what is going to happen over the span of this photo being in our timeline. So we see from the start frame right here, we have the empire state building centered and focus here. And then we now have this end frame that is lower. So let's mess around with this to make this a little bit more different. So typically, the Ken Burns effect is going to be used to go from one edge of a photo to another edge. So as you can see here, we're going from the Empire State Building, like I been showing before, to now a different part of it. But I typically don't like using this effect because honestly, it makes our projects look quite cheap. This effect, especially with the kind of current nature of video editing, is just something that's for the most part, out of date. So what I do like to do, though, is use the Ken Burns effect as a kind of Zoom. So most of the time, I like to use it as a subtle effect. So as you can see right here, we have the start box being the span of the entire image. And then I have this end box, which is a slightly smaller size. So now that it's a slightly smaller size, I'm going to put it within the start box to now create a subtle zoom. So right here we have our start frame. And then, as you can see, there's just a little subtle effect going on from the start to the end. Okay, now, coming back here into the Ken Burns, there's a couple of things that we also want to kind of pay attention to. So as I showed you, we can edit both these start and end boxes, and we have this arrow showing us where the kind of dynamic movement is going to go from. Now, another thing that we see here is we have these yellow guidelines that you see. At some point in this, I can have it and it snaps into place with these yellow lines. And these yellow lines are essentially just rulers, for the most part, and helping us align everything. So as you can see right here, this yellow line appeared because the top of my start box is now aligned with the middle of the frame. Now, if I shift it, let's say, right here, we get to see another alignment that's going on. And it shows us that this yellow line here is going to be the center of our image. So we can do that here. Let's say we resize this end box, it's going to show us at different points where we have our center line at. So right here, we see this is centered in the middle on the horizontal plane. And then if we move it a little more, we can eventually find and have it snap into place with our vertical one. So I'm going to go ahead and enlarge it a little bit, and as you can see right here, it plops in where this center point is. So then I can just adjust it slightly, and that is roughly going to be where that center is going to be in our image. Another thing that we can do is say we have this Zoom effect going, right? I'm going to realign this here and keep this one in its center as well. And let's go ahead and enlarge it a little bit. Okay, so we have this Zoom effect going. Now let's look at how it looks. Now, what if looking back at it, we decide that we want it to be the opposite. So we actually want to start in here at this end frame, and we want to end here at this Zoomed out frame. Well, what we have to do is come here into the crop settings, and then we can just click this one button, and as you can see, the start and end boxes have now swapped places. So let me do that again. Now you can see the start box is bigger, the endbx is smaller. I click it again. Now the start box is smaller and the endbx is bigger. So if we look back at it, we now have a Zoom out effect. And, of course, to enable this or disable this, all you have to do is come here into the crop setting, so we see that Ken Burns is selected. But instead, if you just want to have just this still image and you don't want to have any zooming, then of course, we can click Fit right here, and this one is going to have the entire image. But if you want to have it zoomed in on just one frame, then you can do crop to fill. And it's just like the same as altering one of the start or end boxes within the Ken Burns effect. So I have this crop to fill selected right here. And as you can see, this is not dynamic. It is just one photo that is staying in that place that we've selected using this box. And, of course, you can make it smaller, so it's going to be zoomed in a little bit more now. Or you can make it a little bigger, and you could include some of this black space if you want to. All right. So I'm going to go ahead and select this Ken Burns and keep it here as such. But the Ken Burns effect isn't something that you only are able to use with photos because you can also use it in videos. So let me go ahead and show you how we can do that right now. So let's look at this video. This one is a relatively still image or still video, I should say. Because the camera isn't moving, but we still see that it's a video. We see the boats moving, we see the water moving. So I can go ahead and select this and then come into the crop settings. I can select Ken Burns, and now I can select this end box. Let's say I want to make a slightly more subtle zoom than it is showing right now. Then I can do it. Let's say this right here is aligned in the center. I can now come here, hit Play. And as you can see, it's just a little subtle of a Zoom. So there you have it, this is your full walk through and full rundown of the Ken Birds effect. 33. Start Using Graphics in iMovie: Alright, and this lesson, we're going to be talking about a way to spice up our projects that will really make them look like they could never have came from I Movie and make them look like they came from some professional software. So what we're going to be talking about is implementing graphics within our projects. So in the next few lessons, I'm going to talk to you about all the places that we can actually get these graphics. But in this one, I'm going to actually walk you through how we can use the graphics. So as you see here, I have a few that I've imported that are going to be in this lesson's resources. And each of them could have their own place in a specific project that you're creating. First and most simple, we have this one. And as you can see right now, it's just a black screen. But actually, it's a little bit more than that because if I go ahead and put it here into our project, we see that it's actually a black line. So what could be the purpose of something like this? Well, there's a reason why I pasted it right here in this piece of footage. And that's because as we can see, this is a split screen clip. So, what if I wanted to, you know, just add a little bit of something to this to make this split in the middle be a little less rough? Well, we could add a graphic. Right here, we have this black line. So right now, this here is just pasted into the middle of this, and it's, you know, kind of convenient because this split screen is split in the middle. But what if we wanted to put this line somewhere else? Or what if we wanted to adjust the thickness of it? Well, what we could do is come here into our overlay settings and come to picture and picture. So now this graphic is something that I can go ahead and play with and adjust how I want. So I can go ahead and make this to fit the size of the screen as such to have this divider. Or let's say I wanted to make it a little bit bigger. Then what I could do is I can drag this. And as you see, I'm dragging from here, I could pull it all the way down here to the bottom left of my screen. To now make this graphic huge. So now this line is massive. Okay, so I'm going to go ahead and reset this to bring it back to the normal size. So, this kind of workaround, what I just showed you and using picture and picture to adjust our graphics and to move them is really the key in what enables us to use graphics with an eye movie. So now that you understand this and you understand that we can use picture and picture to do this, let's move on to look at the next graphics, which, in my opinion, are a little bit more fun and cool. So here, let's say that you're editing videos for your YouTube channel or the YouTube channel of one of your clients. Then what you can do is use a graphic like this. So let's go ahead and come here into our overlay settings, change it to picture and picture, and now I can adjust this and put it wherever I want to within my movie. As we see, we have these yellow guidelines that can tell me where I'm positioning this. So right here, we see that it's now centered in the frame. It's centered both vertically and horizontally. If I pull it down, we see here that I have it lined up on the bottom of the screen and in the center. So these are all, you know, ways that we can introduce these. So let's go ahead and click Play. We see that right there. Now, one other thing that we see is this little black piece right here. So let's go ahead and back it up and pause this. So this little back piece is actually a watermark that comes from the software that I pulled this from. Now, I'm going to go ahead and walk you through this software in a later lesson, so you can go ahead and use it yourself to create whatever you want to put into your projects. But for now, let me show you this. So come here, select the clip. And we can come to crop. And what we can do is crop it to include or exclude this watermark right here. So as you see, we have this little watermark right here that says Jitter video. So what I can do is pull this in to exclude. So now if we go ahead and look back into our project, we see that little black piece is now gone. And our subscribe button is there. Now, similarly to this, we can go ahead and put in this graphic. And this one, we can do the same thing. Let's go ahead and put it in picture in picture mode, position it where we want to, say right here in the bottom, and then we see this little rectangle right here. So to get rid of that, again, we're going to come here to crop and we can pull this in just a little bit. And now if we come back, we see that that little black rectangle is gone. So these two, this buy now and subscribe were both made on Jitter dot video. So in one of the next lessons, I'm going to go ahead and walk you through Jitter dot video because this is one of my favorite platforms for getting graphics because graphic design and actually animating these is actually quite difficult if you don't have a software that can do it for you. And Jitter dot video gives us these templates that we can work with. So I'm not going to talk too much about it now because we'll have a lesson dedicated to it, but just remember, we're going to be coming back to these. So next, this is a crumbled piece of paper graphic. Now, this one is also one that I use a lot in my own projects. So what could we actually use this for? So I'm going to go ahead and put this here in the beginning of our video. So this one, this crumbled paper graphic could most, you know, usefully be used in like a title sequence or an outtro sequence. So in a title sequence, I could have this alone right here. So I can select this clip, and if I want to take off this green screen, we have to make sure that it's overlaid because that's an overlay setting. So if I w, I can grab a background. Let's go ahead and use one of these that I provided to you earlier in this course. I'll go ahead and select O here to make a selection and then trim it. So now I have this that I have overlaid. So I'm going to match it up right here. I can select this clip. Now come into overlay settings, select green blue screen. And now, if we go ahead and watch this, we see our paper now coming to life. And I could go ahead and put a title on it. So what I can do with this is go ahead and add any text, any titles either from Canva or right here within I Movie. I can just go grab any one of these to be like an intro sequence. Or I can do the same thing at the end, if I want to zoom out here, I can pull this clip and pull it to match up with this photo here to now, take this still photo and then give it a little bit of life with this graphic. Now let's come back into my media and look at the last two. So, looking at this one, this is a blueprint graphic. So I'm going to go ahead and shorten this selection and bring it in here. So this blueprint is going to work the same way as our piece of paper. We can use this as a title. We can use this as an end sequence, or we can even use it to list things within our project. So let's go ahead and select this and make sure our green screen selection is made. So I can go ahead and select this right here and I can click this eraser because what it just did is it pulled the blue from the blueprint instead of the green from the background. So if I just select the green. So now, to get rid of this green screen, I can just go ahead and select here in the beginning and select the clip, come up here. The go green blue screen. And now we have this blueprint that just rolls in super smooth. With an eye movie, we have nothing that kind of has this kind of behavior. So this is something that's super cool for us to use within our projects. Now, lastly, we have this globe. So what we can do is pull this one in. I'll overlay it here at the end, select it and come and do green blue screen. Right here, we can't see it as much because, you know, there's a lot of colors here in the bottom. So what I would want to do is make sure that this is on some black background. So conveniently enough, we have one in this beginning. So let's go ahead and play it from here. And one thing that I often do with this clip is I speed it up because I want to make the globe, a little bit faster. So what I can do is select it, right clip, click Show speed Editor, and then I can shorten this right here to make it go a little faster because I rarely ever have this going for the full eight second clip. It'll usually be a few seconds, so I can pull it to be this length, and we can see it move a little bit faster. So it's a little more dynamic. And then we have this one right here, which is a 32nd counter clip. So I can lay this on top. And what I'll do for this one is, if any of the videos I'm editing have any numbers that are going to be relevant in counting, then what I'll do is I'll trim this to only include those kinds of numbers. So what I can do is shorten this to, let's say, you know, have only 2000 to say, 4,000. So we have this little area here, and just as before, I can go ahead and come here. I select green blue screen, and now that's taken off. So let's go ahead and look at this within this black background to see it. So as you can see, there's a lot of places and uses that we can use graphics within our e movie projects. And there's an infinite amount of spaces that we can find these graphics online. So in the next few lessons, I'll be going over where we can actually access graphics that we 34. Find Icons and Assets with Flaticon: That you're introduced to graphics, I want to show you a website where I got a lot of graphics for completely free in the beginning of my editing career. The website I'm talking about is called Flat icon. And it's great because we can access icons on almost anything that you can think of. So whenever we're working with videos or movies, and we want to add some kind of visual element to represent what we're talking about, flat icon will most likely have an icon to represent this. So let's go ahead and hop on to flat icon.com so I can show you. Alright, so now we are here at Flat icon. Oh, you can see here their homepage. We have a bunch of different, you know, icons that we can work with here. They have brand icons. They have bold, regular. We can see different kind of art styles and all of their icons. But when I'm using this, I'm never here on their homepage just kind of searching through. Every time I call on Flat icon, I have a purpose. I have something that I'm looking for, and it's something that I can just search up right here. So, let's say I'm making a video about online courses. So what I could do is I can just go ahead and type in course. And we can see what kind of icons that we have. So as you can see, there's a bunch of different icons that I could potentially use in creating this. So because this is an online course, you know, I have right here, which is representing that, there's a bunch of stuff that is kind of putting together the thing of education, right, with this kind of hat and online learning, which is through this computer. So, there's a bunch of things I can choose and bring into my video. So let's go ahead and select, let's say this one here. I can select it right here, and I have honestly so much freedom in being able to change this up and edit it to my liking. So as we can see, when we select an icon, there are a few different versions that are usually available for each icon. And these versions typically represent a different art style. So this kind of style is something that I. So I'm going to go ahead and stick with this one. And what I can do is I can come here and select the size of these icons. Usually, I stick with around 256 pixels because if we have something that is going to be too small, then if we want to enlarge it within our projects, sometimes it's going to come up pixelated and it's not going to be very clear. So, honestly, if you want to be safe, you can just go and stick with the 512 every time. So then all you have to do is select it. We can do a free download, and then it'll pop up into my downloads. So now that it's downloaded, we're here back in I movie. So let's go ahead and actually import this in so we can use it. So I'll just click up here. I can come here. So now I imported it and we can import it just as we would an image or any other kind of video or footage. So I can now go ahead and drag this in. And now we see because I downloaded it at the biggest kind of setting, it's quite big. And naturally, as it's a default kind of image being added into our project, we have this Ken Burns effect going on. So we don't want it like this, obviously. We want to keep it here in the fit, so we're able to see everything. And if I'm going to be using this in a project, I'm not going to be wanting it this big. So instead, what I can do is come here to overlay settings, and you already know all this. We'll come to picture and picture. So now I can put it anywhere I want. So say this would be the beginning of some project. I could have this either, you know, when I'm talking, so there would be some audio, associated with it, or I could just have it as a kind of title screen section. And then additionally, what I'm able to do is I can put a fade on this. So if I wanted to fade in, let's say, for about half a second here, I can have that going. So now let's watch it from the beginning. So, we see it fade in here, and then at the end, it's going to fade out. Now if I don't want this to happen, as I covered earlier in this course, we can hold option and drag out this ending fade if I don't want it to fade out at the end. And I just wanted to go ahead and go straight into the next piece of footage. So now let's hop back into flat icon, and I can show you how we can edit each one of these icons to make it, you know, to our liking. Okay, so now we're here. What if I want to search for an icon of, say, money, so like $1 sign. Let's see what I get with when I search money. So there is a lot, a lot of things to choose from here. What I could do, let's say I want to find something that's $1 sign. We have one right here. So let's click on this. As we can see, this one doesn't have options for us to change it up. There's not other presets that are available to us. So instead, I can just go ahead up here and click Edit icon. And whatever color is present in this icon, I could edit. Here, it's all black, so I can only change it to one other color. So let's make it like a kind of gold. So I could go ahead and download this. But now let's go ahead and look into another one to see more editing options. So here, we have this. We have a few presets. But just as before, I can go in and edit each color that is present in this. So as we hover over them, we get to see what color we'd be editing. So let's say we want to change the interior of these bills to be a different kind of green, let's say. Can go ahead and drag this, bring it up. And now, as we see, we have that interior of the bill now changing colors as I drag this. So I can make it anything. I can pull it in here, make them black. I can go ahead and make it transparent so we can see through it. Here, we have multiple layers stacked up on each other. So in making it transparent, we only see the back color of it. But let's go ahead and do this. I'll put it here, make it a normal kind of green color. But now let's look at this color right here because we see that it's highlighting, this coin. So I'm going to change the color here, and if I make this transparent, we get to see that now that kind of disappeared, and we have a transparent background to work with. So I'm going to go ahead and download this and we're going to drag it into our project. So now that it's downloaded, I can just go ahead and drag this and put it anywhere within my project. So say if I wanted to have these two next to each other on this kind of film background. So right now, we see the Ken Burns effect at play here again. So to turn that off, we'll just come over here into cropping, click fit, and then come here and adjust it to picture in picture mode. So if I wanted to have these two at the same time, what I would have to do is extend this piece, this graphic right here, and I would export this segment. So these two become one. And then when that's done, when these two are consolidated into one piece of footage, I could then add this on top to then have both of these there at the same time. In a later lesson, we are going to go over and see how we can have multiple these graphics there at the same time. But if you haven't seen it earlier in this course, we do discuss how we have this multi overlay done with an eye movie. But there you have it. I mean, Flat icon is a great website that we can get free icons to work with within our projects that can really illustrate so many things and just give it a little bit more of a visual kind of interesting aspect. The best part of it all, it's free. Now, everything on flat icon is static. These aren't animated icons that we are working with. So in the next lesson, I'm going to show you a website that we can use to go ahead and grab so many graphic elements that are going to be animated that we can put into our projects. I'll see you there. 35. Animate Graphics with Jitter: I'm quite excited about this lesson because I'm going to be giving you a website that's frankly just OP. Why do I call it OP? Well, we can have some professional looking graphics animations in our e movie projects really in just a few clicks. And just as the last software I showed you, it's completely for free. And, of course, the software that I'm talking about is jitter dot video. Now, Jitter is the software that is responsible or creating animations like this one right here and this one right here. Both are animations that I provided you in the intro to graphics lesson. So while this one right here, the subscribe animation was a default one on Jitter, this is one that I was able to create myself in just a few minutes. So I think the best way to show you Jitter and its functionalities is for us to go ahead and recreate this animation right here. So now let's hop into Jitter, and I'll show you what it's all about. Okay, so now we are here in Jitter dot video. So let's go ahead and look through all these templates that are available to us, and again, I say, free to use. So we have this animated search bar. This is one of the first ones. This is one that I personally use a lot in my own projects. So here, it pops up and we can put anything in this text box that we want to. Here's another one it's a pop up of an iPhone i message notification. So here we have a progress bar. Another one, we have some kind of presets for how we can go about creating these kinds of animations right here with different kinds of videos. We also have some animated handles. So for social media, we have Instagram right here, and I know that they have a few other ones as well on this platform. But the first thing to notice is how high quality all of these look. And these are not just for show. As I showed you in I movie, I've actually downloaded these and use them myself, and we see that they are quality, and they are as they present. But let's go ahead and swipe down until right here. As we can see, we have this subscribe button. And let's go ahead and click this and see how we can change this up to make it into that by now button, as I showed you in the beginning of this lesson. So the first step when we're in here, we have to duplicate it to edit it. And now, once we've done that, we can see here at the bottom that we have this timeline, and we see that it is here up until 4 seconds that this runs. So if we want to extend it to have it as a longer kind of video when we export it, we can go ahead and do that. But for now, I'm going to keep it at this four second mark. We get to see every kind of element that is used in this in creating this. Now, these are all relatively complicated and stuff I'm not going to be getting into because honestly, I could make an entire course on how to create animations within this software itself, but that's a little bit too complicated for us to tackle. So instead, let me show you how we can do something simple and use this template that already has all these animations and looks nice and have us tweak it into something different that we can use in the same kind of respect. Okay, so we see here that we have all of these associated with something different that is happening. And there's quite a few. So let me go ahead and drag this up so we can see all of them. So with this cursor animation, we're going to ignore that. We don't want to mess with that. It's a little complicated. What we want to do is go ahead and focus on this button right here. So what we're going to do is drop down these right here to then be able to edit the text. So, as you can see, this text is now, selected, and all you can do is double click here, and now I can change it to let's say by now. So, as you can see, the subscribe is still here, even though I just hit Delete and typed in by now. And that's because we haven't actually changed the button intro. Instead, we changed the second state of the button, which is this click. So, so if we go ahead and click this button Intro, come here to subscribe in scale, we can just drag down the box where we had the By now edit. And now we can be able to edit this to say B now. And then if we come back here into the button click, we see our By now is now down here, and we can just go ahead and put it back into place. So now, you see once it clicks, it's all good, and it says, B now now instead of subscribe. So we also want to change two things here. We want to change the color, and we want to change this icon because we don't want to keep it as YouTube. So in terms of changing the color, this one's pretty easy. We're going to go ahead here and make sure we're in this button intro, select this button right here, button scale in, and then we can come here to design. And then here under Phil, we can change the color. So here I'm going to go ahead and make it, this light blue, and we can keep it like this. Now the last thing that we have to do is change this YouTube icon into, let's say, a bag, like the original one. So all I have to do to do that is come here into button. And we have this right here, which is icon dot s Vg. And we see that it's an icon and not say text because it has this image right here next to it instead of these Ts. So to replace this icon, we need to have another icon to replace it with. Now, if only there was a website that we knew of that gave us a bunch of icons for free. Well, if you watch the last lesson, then yes, you guessed it. Now we're going to move over to flat icon to get an icon to replace this YouTube Playb. So now we're here in Flat icon, and I can go ahead and say I type in purchase, just to see what they have to show for us, and I can just select whatever I like. Okay, so why don't I just go ahead and select this one right here? Now, one thing to notice is that this one has a black outline. And here, it would be better to fit with this entire, you know, aesthetic and style for it to be white. So what I can do is come in here, like I showed you in the last lesson and using this, I can click Choose a new color, and I can change it from black to white. And now I can just download it, and then I'll show you now how we can replace it within Jitter. So to replace this, all I have to do is make sure that this is selected our icon, make sure I'm in the Design tab, and then come down here to Media and click Replace Media, and then we just have to select the downloaded file. So I have it right here as a cart. I can click Upload. And there you have it uploaded right now and fill that space perfectly. So now here, I'm going to go over to animate just so we can watch this in action. There we go. So now that we've created this, let's go ahead and export it and bring it into our e movie. So to export it, I just have to come up here, click Export. I can export it as a video. Alright, so once this is exported, all we have to do is click this Download button. And sometimes it's a little wonky and it doesn't work as we want it to. So when we have a problem at this stage, all you have to do is right click it and click Download Link file, and then that'll fix whatever issue you have. So now we have this button right here in my Download, so I can just go ahead and drag and drop it in. So, just as we did before in the intro lesson to this section, all I have to do is come over here, select picture and picture. And now I can change this to whatever orientation I want, have it here in the beginning, and let's look at this. So there you go. That's how we can create this original design using a template that was originally made for a subscribe button for YouTube. So like I said before, Jitter is an amazing platform. And no, this isn't sponsored. I wish it was because I use Jitter so much. And it's really like a cheat code when it comes to creating these graphics and animation. As you just saw, I created that little animation using a template in minutes. It's super easy and it's super functional for us to change what they have to put our own thing, our own touch on it, to make it our own original design. Okay, but that's enough gigging out. We have a lot more to cover in the rest of the scores. So let's get to it. 36. Integrate Music Into Your Project: Now it's time to work with, honestly, a very essential part of editing, and that's going to be our music. We've been working with this project a lot throughout this course. And if we are going to be making this into something that is a cohesive project, then one thing that we kind of need in this is music, because that is just one layer of this video that's essentially non existent. We have our little sound effects here. Um, here we have our Seagulls. We have a train pass. This one, this video right here has its own sound effects that have been compiled in it, but the music has gone. There's nothing there. So let's go over here into our audio and video and try to find a tune that we like. This one I already inspired. It's quite loud, but I think the beginning of this is going to be something that's going to work well with this project. So let's just go ahead and drag this entire 1 minute and 22 clip. Now, when working with music, as it is an audio layer, there's two options that we have. The first one is going to be dragging in like normal in our sound effects. So this here is going to be in the normal audio layers. And the alternative option that we have is working with our background music well. So that's down here. As you can see, there's this music icon right here, and there's a little box that's kind of hard to see, but it's there. So what we're able to do is either have it here in our audio layers or we can drag it down to then enter our background music well. Now, what are the differences between these two? In functionality, the two main things that differentiate them are first, how I Movie looks at each piece of audio. So here in the background music well, I Movie is processing it as music. So it knows this and it knows that it's going to be background aspects. It's not going to be something that is going to be here in our main audio section, which could potentially be some dialogue or something that's going to be kind of pivotal to our project. Now, in that, in our background music well, the way that I movie treats it is as such as background music. So it's naturally going to be something that's going to be in the background, so it's going to be a little quieter than what we would have here in our main section. But now let's go ahead and actually listen back to this. So let's start here in the beginning of this project. So, I like the jazzy tune because it's kind of a a New York staple. You know, New York was one of the home places of where jazz came from in America. So I like having a jazzy tune for this project. Now, one thing, although it is the background music well, we see that it's still quite loud. We definitely want to turn this down quite a bit. And that's always going to be the case when you're working with any audio that you're going to be adding on top of what's already there in your project. Like, most sound effects and most music, you're going to want to turn down to about the 20% range. So now let's listen. Yeah. So, as you can see, this already gives it a completely different kind of feel to it. So before, let's just see this again, I'm going to take out the music, and we're gonna listen again. Now, You see, it's a completely different project. And the same way that we would cut any footage, we can cut audio. So I'm gonna come over here, and then I'm going to right click, and I'm just gonna click Split Click. I'm gonna go ahead and get rid of this extra piece at the end. So this is essentially what we're working on. Honestly, I'd still turn this down to let's drop it to say 18. Now let's listen. And you see, music has such a big control over your project, because the kind of music that I am going to put into my project is going to essentially influence how the viewer is going to feel when they're watching this. So if I were to use this exact same footage here and then just have some sad music, it's quite likely that the viewer is going to feel sad or at least expect something sad to come up. But now this I have some upbeat jazz music. And it gives it a kind of vibe, a kind of swagger to the entire project and helping the viewer feel that kind of way. Now, earlier in this lesson, I said that we can have our music either here or here in our normal audio. So what's the difference? Well, another one that we have here is, as you can see, there's this green line that is attaching our audio to this first piece of footage. So that means that these are connected. So if I ever were to move this we see that the audio is now moving with it. Now, if I were to delete this, we see deleting the footage also deleted the audio. So essentially, the difference in having the background music well to our normal timeline, the difference is that the audio is now dependent on the footage in the timeline, but in the background music well, the audio stands independent of anything happening within the timeline. So as you can see, if I were to drop this down back into the music well, I can now move this and nothing is happening to our music. Now, again, I want to assert how important music is to your projects. Your music is going to make or break a project in terms of whatever kind of message that you're trying to send out to your viewers. If you have some project that is a quite serious one and you have some music that is, say, extremely over the top and epic, that messaging is not going to align. And because of this, because this music is going to contradict the kind of story that you're creating in your visuals, this contradiction is going to make any message that you're trying to get across to the viewer completely invalid and confusing. Now, on the other hand of this, if you're choosing music that greatly complements whatever it is you're trying to associate or you're trying to convey within your project, then music can be a huge ally to you. Now, in terms of finding music within E movie, what I did and what I recommend that you do if you're going to be saying within Eye movie is instead of filtering it through any specific sound effects, what I would just do is go ahead and come here and filter it by time length because we're going to have kind of songs in different kind of folders that they have and, you know, these basic ones that come on I Movie. And one thing to find good music that can span across an entire project is really to just filter this by time, so you're not going through a bunch of different folders, trying to find those exact songs or trying to look for songs that have enough length to them. This is just a very fast way to do this, so you're not wasting your time. So, just come here and you can go ahead and filter this by time from the greatest to smallest. Because as we can see, there's not too many on Emovie that are going to be of, you know, substantial length. We have about, you know, about, I'd say, maybe less than 20% of this library is anything that's going to be above 30 seconds in length. Alright, well, that's it for this lesson on music. Now, in this section, we're going to tackle a bunch more things when it comes to eye movie and audio, so be prepared. 37. Equalize Your Audio With iMovie: That we're moving on in the audio section, one thing that we need to cover is equalizer settings. So what I decided to do to kind of illustrate this and demonstrate this is I pulled in a YouTube video, asking New Yorkers what they do for a living. I wanted to get a street interview because I feel like the street interview is a good way to kind of demonstrate a lot of the equalizer settings that we have. And first off, we have this reduced background noise. So let's go ahead and look at this video right here. So, how's it been so far? It's good. It's a great city. So what's the range of salary that someone can make doing what you do? The average for year is 120. So what's your biggest expense for living here? So we can hear there is a lot going on in the background. What we're hearing isn't just these two people's voices. There's a little bit of music going on, but there's also a lot of kind of background noise happening. So, let's go ahead and check this box off. And now let's listen to it, I guess. So, how's it been so far? It's good. It's a great city. So what's the range of salary that someone can make doing what you do? Now the average for here is 120. So what's your biggest expense for living here? I think it's for rent. It's between 3,003.5. And what is it? Is one bedroom on and off. It's crazy. I great far so far. Is that a great city? So what's the range of salary? And I'm going to put it at 100%, and then I'm gonna be turning it off and on for you to see the difference. So how's it been so far? It's good. It's a great city. So what's the range of salary that someone can make doing what you do? The average for year is 120. So what's your biggest expense for living here? I think for rent. It's between 3,003.5. And what is it? Is it one bedroom? Yes. It's crazy. It's crazy. I really thought it would be easy asking New Yorkers what they do. So, as we can see here, with this turned all the way up, it's very isolated in their voices. Now, would I do this on this video per se? Would I have 100% reducing background noise? Honestly, probably not because we do see some distortion to their voice. And also another thing that's happening here, is that there was already music that was edited along with this footage. So it's not only going to be kind of having to sort out the background noise, but it's also kind of trying to work with that background music as well. Now, if this were something that, you know, we were editing from scratch eye movie, what I would do is take the original audio, right? That's just coming from this microphone, and then I would reduce the background noise to that, and then I would add the music separately. So this is able to kind of have, like, a crisp kind of effect here, where it's only isolating their voices and it knows exactly what it needs to cut out and it's not getting confused by anything. So now, what's so fare other effects that we have here. So with this equalizer, we have a bunch to work with. There's voice enhance, music enhance, loudness, hum reduction, base boost, base reduced, trouble boost, and trouble reduce. Okay, so now, each of these are going to have kind of its own its own use in certain kind of cases. So, first off, let's go ahead and try this voice and hands. Now let's listen to this. So how has it been so far? It's good. It's a great city. So what's the range of salary that someone can make what you do? The average for year is 120. So what's your biggest expense for living here? I think it's for rent. It's between 3,000. What happens if we turn off the background noise? If we turn off the reducing in the background noise? How's it been so far? It's good. It's a great city? So what's the range of salary that someone can make doing what you do? The average for year is 120. So what's your biggest expense for living here? I think it's for rent. It's between 3,300. There's enough fact there that's going on. Is it a desirable effect? Probably not. But this is the kind of situation where this equalizer is going to be used. So now let's look at music enhanced and see how it. It's good. Is that a great city? So what's the range of salary that someone can make? Doing what you do. The average for year is 120. So what's your biggest expense for living here? I think. So as we can see, that's not a good one to use right here. Now, the music enhanced is going to be best used if we are having something where music is in the background, and there's not too much going on. Maybe it's some background noise happening, and there's music. In that case, if you want to get the music to kind of stand out, using this equalizer music enhanced is something that's going to be good for that. Now let's go ahead and look at loudness. Range of salary that someone can make doing what you do. The average for e is 100 twenty's your biggest expense for living here? Savings for rent. There's not much of an effect at all that happens from that. Now, hum reduction. This one I wouldn't imagine. So far. It's a great CD. Hum reduction is mainly going to be used in kinds of videos where you have some kind of consistent humming, consistent kind of buzzing that happens in that audio, whether that be due to some kind of outside noise happening, whether that's from the microphone deficiencies. But regardless, this hum reduction is going to be very good at cutting that one out. So now, next we have bass boost. So again, this one So how's it been so far? It's good. More tailored to, like, when you're working with music very specifically. Now, for this, let's actually go back and work into our New York project to see this one in action. Okay, so now we are here, and I'm going to go ahead and turn the audio back on to this jazzy down tempo music. And we're going to go over here into EQ. And first, we're going to listen to it normally. Now, what we're gonna do is add some k. So it looks like a base boost. Now I'm gonna put it back to flat. And back to base booze. Now, you can see, it's a subtle change, but it's something that works quite well. If you just kind of want to add a little bit more kind of umph to your music, then you can turn on this base boost, and it's a good little effect to work with. Now, let's go to base reduce. How is that gonna work? So, as you can see, the music is way more flat now. There's no kind of rumble that's coming from it. Now let's go to base boost as to show the opposite. It automatically becomes much more full. So next we have treble boost and treble reduce. So, this one is mainly going to come in use when you're working with music with vocals or, honestly, just any kind of vocal scene. So let's go ahead and go back to our YouTube video that we are working on. It's good. It's a great CD. So what's the range of scary that someone can make doing what you do? The average for e is 120. So see how when I turn that on, it separates the audio from kind of everything else or the dialogue from everything else, just the. So what's your biggest expense for living here? I think. Now, if I were to treble reduce, we can see the opposite effect happen. Between 3,003.5. So we see What is it bedroom? The dialogue from them, the words that they're saying is now kind of more blended into the background mute, like to the background happenings, right? It's not very separate. Now, we can see this also being done with music. So if we were to treble boost some kind of song that we had and it had vocals to it, then we'd see those vocals stand out with a treble boost. And then we'd see them in the opposite. We'd see them kind of fade into the background more with a treble reduce. Now, a tip that I have here when you're working with some kind of footage that the audio just isn't the best. You know, we have each kind of thing here that is going to be have its main purpose, right? Oftentimes, what can happen is that something that wasn't made for it tends to actually improve it quite a bit. It can help it sound much better, even though that kind of equalizer wasn't made for it. So my tip to you when you're in that situation is just go through the equalizer, like if you don't have a good audio on a clip, and just go and select each one down the line, even if it wasn't made for it, go ahead and test these all out, and maybe to your surprise, one might work pretty well. 38. Applying Audio Filters to Your Project: It's time to get into one of the more fun things to play around with in eye movie when it comes to audio, and that's going to be our audio effects. So what are audio effects, and where can we find them? Audio effects are going to be found right here. And this tab right here, this is going to be our filter and audio effects. So in a different lesson, we're going to go over the clip filters. So this is going to be applying filters to footage. But for now, we're going to be focusing on the audio effects. So the audio effects are quite cool because they give us a lot of options because they give more character and honestly just versatility to what we're able to do with our audio. So let's go ahead and look at these audio effects. So I can select whatever clip with audio or just sole audio clip that I want to use. So let's go ahead and use this music right here. So I can come up here into audio effects, and as you can see, we have all of these. We have one, two, three, four, five, or we have 20 audio effects that we are going to be working with. So let's look at these. So first one we have is muffled. So that sounds quite muffled. Again, let's listen to the normal one, just so you have that first basis. We have bot, which is honestly kind of ear rape, not fun. This one's also pretty loud. Echo delay. We have telephone. I like this one. This one's quite accurate. Sounding like it's coming from a telephone. Like, this is some hold kind of music. We have this radio? Yeah, this one's not great. We have small room. So this gives it, like, an echo. And this is, like, honestly, like, a quite impressive feature. Like, if you're ever creating something, creating a movie or any kind of project where, you know, you're gonna have people that are going to be dialoguing in a room. Say it's some kind of party, and you have, like, two people and you want to create the atmosphere yourself through your editing, this is amazing to do that. Cause as we see, like, the normal audio clip is extremely clear, very focused. And then coming here into the rooms, like, it really feels like this is, like, something that someone just recorded from a room that they were in. We have medium room, which is supposedly supposed to be a little bit bigger, and we have large room. And this one I can really see the difference between small room and large room. And then we have the biggest of all cathedrals. Now, following these, we have all of the pitches. So pitch down one, pitch down two, pitch down three, and the lowest we have pitch down four. Now, obviously, like these effects are all going to come into play in their own situations. Like for example, there's going to be some audio effects that you probably will never use for music, per se, and some that are going to be used for more audio. So, for example, like these rooms right here, this is a pretty good, like, use case for this is to have it be with music because you're going to be wanting to create an atmosphere at least, like in your projects, and having these effects here are very good to be able to do that. Now, with robot, you're probably going to put you're never gonna put any music through this robot filter. This is going to be for any kind of very specific effect. Say you have some character that you're working with, and the character is a robot. So you want to use this audio effect to create his dialogue. Okay, so we saw the audio effect on the music. Now let's go ahead and look at how audio effect could be used on this train pass effect. So let's go ahead and listen to this. Here's the basic one. See, now, this muffled thing could work well if we were working, say, through a screen or something. We were looking at the train through kind of some kind of wall, some kind of barrier in between us. The muffled would work in helping to create that accurate kind of piece of imagery. Yeah, so we see different effects here, and none of them are essentially going to be helping in creating this imagery and creating a cohesive project here. And probably the same thing is going to be with Siegel's, but let's go ahead and still listen to this and see if we like any. So, honestly, with the Seagulls, because this is going to be, like, a distance shot, there's a lot of things, you know, that could potentially be going on in here. Because I added the Seagull effect to kind of give it a little bit more depth, it could be the case that the Seagulls are far away, and maybe I want that to be the case. So I can go ahead and put this muffled effect to this to have this kind of, you know, distance effect, so it's not going to be so loud. So let's go ahead and now listen back to it. I. Right now, the audio is the music is a little too loud. So let's just go ahead and turn it off. And now let's listen back to this. Yeah, so, honestly, like, the muffled seagulls here creates a little bit more of an accurate picture to kind of what I was envisioning, as opposed to just having the none right here, no effect, and having it be very loud. Like, it really does sound like here with how clear the Seagulls is that I should be seeing some seagulls in the frame, but that's not the case. This is supposed to be like background sound effect. So having this muffled sound effect, I think it makes it work a little bit better. Now, when it comes to editing the audio effects, we don't really have too much kind of freedom in being able to do so. So we're not able to affect the intensity of all of these effects. So to honestly account for this, what you're really going to have to be working with is going to be the volume. So this is going to be the kind of extent that we have of editing the kind of polarity and how uh kind of powerful these effects are. Now, when it comes to these audio effects, you have all of these to work with, and they're going to be fun for you to play around and see what kind of helps and works in your projects. These ones are always a good thing to go through and just kind of have some fun and adding a little bit more character to your projects. 39. Detach Audio to Work Efficiently: In this lesson, we're going to go over something that I kind of quickly glossed over earlier in this course. And that's going to be separating video from audio. So what do I mean by this? Well, let's go ahead and pull in our piece of footage that we're going to be working with. So, right here, we have this screen recording. So this screen recording is just something I recorded from my phone from YouTube. So all it is is just bird singing. Now, this is because I was in the sound effects and I was trying to find some birds chirping, but there was nothing. So when there's nothing in the sound effects, one thing that you can easily resort to is YouTube to find these sound effects. And as you can see here, there's no copyright to the sound effect, so I'm able to use this. Now, obviously, when I want this sound effect, I'm not going to want the video associated with it. Now, let's look at this video of us in the park, right? So I'm going to go ahead and split this, and I'm going to drag this right here. Now, one thing that we could do is I could go ahead and put this piece of footage above this, right? Now, let's go ahead and mute the audio here. So we're just hearing the sound effects, right? Now, this is all fine, sure, but what if I need the second layer? Now, in this scenario, I do need this second layer because this transition, if not, is just going to transition into this bird singing, and we obviously don't want that. We don't want to have this footed you. So I'm going to go ahead and undo now to go back to how we were. Now we have this here. Now to separate the audio from the footage, it's super easy and simple. All we have to do is right click and then click Detach Audio. Now, alternatively, we could hit Option Command B. I can just click Detach Audio, and now these are both linked. So if I were to go ahead and delete the footage, we see that the audio goes away as well. This is because these are now linked, and what I would have to do is bring it over to here. So it's linked to this one now, and I can just go ahead and get rid of it. So now I can go ahead and mute this and we can listen to this sound effect. And as you can see, the sound effect also has some wind blowing in it, so it makes it feel like it's quite accurate as to what the actual picture is. And again, like I showed you earlier, we could come in and work with the audio effects. So if I want, I could go ahead and put some muffled effect on it. To make it feel like the birds are more out in the distance or I can just go ahead and stay with the original sound effects. Now, there you guys have it. This one was a quick lesson to just show you how we can separate audio from our footage because it's super useful. And when I movie doesn't have the sound effects that we're looking for, to just get it for free on YouTube. 40. Use Software to Find the Perfect Sounds - Epidemic Sounds: One on the topic of audio and more specifically, music, there's something to be said about the basic library that is here in Eye Movie. And that's just the fact that it's not very extensive. When it comes to long songs that we can have within our eye movie projects, there's really not too much to work with, right? Here, just scrolling down for, like, a second, already get down to the 32nd mark when it comes to time. This is me filtering the time from longest to shortest. The longest thing we have here is 2 minutes and 16 seconds. So what I want to show you in this lesson is a platform that we can get almost an infinite amount of music from, and that is called Epidemic Sound. So right here, we're in Epidemic Sound, and this is a paid platform. So this is something if you really want to kind of beef up the kind of audio and music that you have, then this is going to be a great platform to do so. Now, we not only have music in here, but we also do have sound effects. So we have our eye movie library of sound effects and Music right here is now expanded to an entire platform of, like, thousands of sound effects and music. So let's go ahead and walk through this platform to see what it offers us and how we can use it with an Eye. So now, if we go back to our project, we have this jazzy down tempo music play. Now, what if we want to get something that is still in the jazz realm, but it's just going to be something that we like a little bit more than that. Well, we can come over here to music with an epidemic sound, and I can select jazz. Then usually what I do in this is I just go through and listen to these tracks. Sometimes I'll skip to these purple areas. Because these are often the most played to or most pulled parts of these songs or sound effects. So we can see a couple of things here. We get to see the duration of these, and we get to see the BPM. So this is beats per minute. So if we have a BPM that is low, then that means it's more likely going to be a slower song, right? This one here is a 57 BPM song, and we can see how slow it goes. It's about a beat a second. So but then we have these up here. This one's 280. You can see this is a much faster song. Sometimes I want to filter by this BPM. So what I'm able to do is come over here to low tempo, high tempo. But I also could come over here and do something a little bit more specific. So we can select this BPM and I can choose a high end and a low end. So say I want everything above 80 and then 320 to be the max. It does that filters. And again, oftentimes what I'll do is I'll just go click down through these. I'll go to the most play parts. And within like a second or two, I can see if it's like a vibe that I would like in my project. And then we also have these right here, these icons, and this means that the song has vocals and it's not just an instrumental. Most of the music here is going to be instrumental because this is used for editors. Epidemic Sound is an editor platform, and most of the time, when you're editing videos, you don't want to have vocals in them. So most of them are going to be instrumentals, and I like that personally. But now, if you do want to have vocals in the song that you're choosing, then you could come up here to vocals, and then you could select that. And then as you see right here, all of these are gonna happen. Mom crossing by Boy That's when you get. Okay, so here we saw these by jazz. We saw them by the genre. Now, let's back up and come back down here to moods. So we can choose these genres. We can choose pop, jazz, electronic. And oftentimes, a lot of the tracks are also going to be a kind of crossover of different genres. Now, another thing that's super helpful is moods. So oftentimes when I was creating videos, what I would do is come here to mood because like I told you, music is going to help us in communicating a certain kind of message in our videos. Music is either going to make or break our message. And if we have a song that is accompanying our footage that is very fitting to that, then it really makes the viewer feel what it is that we're trying to convey in that piece of footage in that movie, whatever it is. So it's easy to often come here to moods to do this because you can think of the kinds of feelings that are going to be associated with different genres. But in moods, this does it all for us. So if we look here at the moods, then we see happy, dreamy, epic, laid back, euphoric, all these different types of moods. So, like I told you, this is going to be one of my favorite sections to use within epidemic sounds, and suspense is always a good one to choose. So if we're just going through them, we can see a lot of them are going to be slower. So how do we account for this? If we want something to be a little faster? Well, I can drag my BPM to be at least 100 and now it two. So as you can see, the suspense music is going to be a little faster now that we've applied this BPM filter. So now let's go back into jazz, and I'm going to show you a couple more things that we can do with these. So I've now pulled this song. Let's say I've chosen this one and I want to use it. But for whatever reason, it's too long, and I want to create a different variation that's going to be shorter. So what I can do is come over here and create variations right here. So say I want a 15 second clip of it, and I want it to be something that's coherent, right? I don't want to go ahead and search myself to find what 15 seconds work the best because, you know, it's going to take a little bit of time. Now, what epidemic does is when I select this preferred length, it gives me multiple variations. So as we can see, there's little cuts here. And these little cuts is epidemic, making these cuts and patching it with different parts of the song to make something that is fitting within this 15 second time. We're able to also assist it in this process. So let's say that we don't want this section from 15 seconds to 30. Whatever there's something in this song that we don't like, so we want to get rid of it. All I have to do is grab and drag, and then I can click Avoid Section. Now, if we know from 45 seconds to a minute or from 45 to let's say, 50, we want this section for sure. Here, I would click use section. And then as you see, now it's creating different versions here that have this section in use. So now, what if we want to use this song within our I movie? All we have to do is come over here and we can just download it right here. And it gives us options right here. We can essentially split the track up between the different instruments that were used. So we can do it with melody or instruments based drums, so you're able to essentially switch it up to how you like it. But this is going to really be way more of an advanced thing. For the most part, you're always just going to do the full mix. And then our file format, we want to keep it in MP three because this is what is compatible with I Movie. So then I can just go ahead and download it, and then we go ahead, come back here into I Movie. Let's go ahead and delete this Jazz down tempo. And then I can go ahead and drag this in. So now let's go ahead and turn it down to, let's say, 20%. So that's how it works right now. I think the song works pretty nice in here. Now, one thing that I do want to mention is this New York trip little graphic that we have here that we made in Canva, it doesn't have kind of any sound effect associated with it. And it is there's movement here. It's sliding into place. So I want to add a sound effect. But here, within the eye movie sound effects, there's nothing that really fits this quite to my liking. So, luckily, for us, we have epidemic sounds. And as I said before, it doesn't only have a music section, but it has a sound effects section as well. So I can just go ahead and click this swoosh section. I can click this whoosh. These are both going to give me kind of sound effects that are going to be fitting within this thing that I want. But just looking at the other stuff that they have, there's ambience, water, cartoon, vehicles, objects. So this is going to be specific stuff like pencil writing on paper, a highlighter. They have some design sounds. So this is specifically Epidemic Sound has these signs that they design and put into their software, they have risers. So risers are also good for creating suspense right up until some big moment. But let's go ahead and search for some sound effects here. I'm going to go ahead and search for a soft Woche. Now let's just go ahead and listen to these. Okay, so I'm looking at these and what if you want to switch it up? Let's say, instead of doing a soft Woche, we can have an impact, it's impacting down into place on that graphic. So let's go ahead and search for this. So, as you can see, there are so many different sound effects that we have that we can choose from. So I'm going to go ahead and come back here into the soft Wohes. And I'm going to say, Let's go ahead and I'm going to do an impact soft whoosh and see what comes up here. No You know what? I think I like this first little variation right here. It might be a little long, but I'm going to just go ahead and use this. So I can segment this right here. So instead of doing the full track, which is, let's go back and look at this 1 minute and 9 seconds, I can segment and just choose the part that I want, which is this right here. This first 3 seconds. So now I download this. I can go back into Eye Movie and I can just drag it in. So now let's see how this is. So, right there, it's quite epic, and I don't know if that's the kind of vibe that I want to go for in this. So instead, what I want to do is shorten this to here, and then I can add, like, a little bit of a fade that comes in to, you know, make a little less epic as it is right now. Yeah, I like it right now. You know, there's something going on at every point. There's nice music in the background. It doesn't get boring. So as you see, Epidemic Sound is a quite extensive platform that you can use very easily and very intuitively in your projects. Now, in terms of pricing, I think the basic membership is around 17 USD per month. And if you're going to be using this consistently, then I think it's definitely worth it to have both your music and sound effects all compiled in one place that is going to be super easy for you to navigate and you can save them. You can put them in folders. I think it's a super great platform that I personally love. But that's it for Epidemic Sound. Now we're going to be continuing on moving forward in I movie. So I'll see you there. 41. Use YouTube - the Greatest Platform for Stock Footage: Now in this lesson, I'm going to go over something that we've talked about throughout this course in bits and pieces, but it's something that is so important that I think it calls for its own lesson dedicated to it. And as you can see by the lesson title, it's going to be leveraging the power of YouTube in our editing. So YouTube is an especially powerful toolbox that we can have at our disposal, because with IMV, we have certain selections that, you know, seem relatively big, but in comparison to what is out there, they're extremely small. So what do I mean by this? Well, to begin with, if we're looking at our sound, so our sound effects in music, this is the entire library that comes kind of default with Eye Movie. Now, as you can see, there's a lot here. But really, when it comes to the specific things that you are going to be looking for in your project, oftentimes, you're not going to find what you need within this I movie basic library. Now, sure, you can find some songs within their library, which, hey, might as well work for your project, but we sometimes want to find stuff that is perfect. Now, at YouTube, we can find an infinite selection of music and sound effects. And that's not only it. It goes further than that because as we already spoke about, we have infinite amounts of green screen kind of graphics that we can look for. We can look for transitions and so much stuff. But enough of me talking about this with an I movie, let's actually get into YouTube, and I can show you. Okay, well, we're here in YouTube, and like I said before, I've already shown you what we can look for on YouTube and other lessons, but in here, I want to kind of compile everything that YouTube can offer us in our editing to kind of beef up and upgrade our movies. So first, we can look at green screen transitions. And as you can see, we have so many here. We can look we can see these. So As you can see, we have a couple of different newspaper transitions here or paper transitions, and we can easily pull these into eye Movie and then just get rid of this green screen, and we're able to use them. Let's go ahead and look at here. So here we have some fire transitions. So as you can see, these ones are super cool transitions that we can't really use in eye movie. We can't have anything that's very similar to this or looks anything like this within Eye Movie. But for YouTube, we can grab them super duper easily. Now, later in this lesson, if you don't already know how to grab these using a YouTube downloader and stasher, then stay here to the end of the video, and then I'm going to show you how we can pull these out and download them in just a few seconds. Now for the rest of these, let's go ahead and look at other ways that we can use YouTube. So we have these transitions, and as you can see, there are so many just right here in one playlist. And this is all by the same creator, Green PDia. So there's so much stuff here and transitions that we can really not get anywhere close to within I Movie, and they honestly just look dope. So let's go ahead and move on to other things that we can use. Let's go ahead and search up some so I can just click this playlist. And as you can see, we have this super cool galaxy, have some calming ocean, and these are all. Again, I'm going to show you at the end of this lesson how we can download them super easily. Right now, we have infinite amounts, infinite that we can use within our projects. So so far, we did green screen transitions, and now we have dynamic backgrounds. Now let's move on to, let's say, copyright free. And there are so many channels that are completely based around this. So let's go ahead. On mute and listen to. So, this one is a super popular super popular sound. Super popular Hoya. That that you've probably heard of many times before. And here we have access for copyright. Did I get up? I miss belly out of side. And as you can see, just as before, we have certain channels that this is what they do. So we have no copyright sounds here, and I can just go to their page, and we can go ahead and click around, Listen. And oftentimes they'll have playlists based on the kind of genre of music that you might want to be searching for. So for example, one that I used to use quite a bit in my projects was copyright free jazz music. So copyright free jazz music. And right here, as you can see as you can see, I have watch times on all of these. And you can just do this with whatever genre you want. So you can go ahead and search copyright free and then whatever genre. And you'll find so many. So now we see music. Now, what about specific sound effects? So let's go ahead and search a popular viral sound effects. So, this search would be mostly for kind of short form editing. But as we can go ahead and listen, let's go ahead and look at this short Brad. And, hey, you know, you might not be using these in your eye movie in your eye movie movies. But this one would be the same concept as before as putting this into a downloader, and then we'll have all of these sound effects available to us, and then we can just trim the video or trim the audio to get the exact ones. So now let's go ahead and go back to music, and then I'll show you how we can download them. So now we are back in the song that we viewed earlier. Now, as I just showed you, I showed you a few couple ways that we can use YouTube to kind of enhance our movies. We have music, we have sound effects. We have backgrounds, and we have transitions. And that's not everything. But these ones are just four quick ones that just came to mind that really are super easy for you to go ahead and pull out and use, which is what I want to show you right now. So the first thing that we are going to have to do and to be able to pull these entire videos or audio from YouTube is we have to have a YouTube downloader. Now, I just went ahead and pulled one up that I recommend. I use it myself, and there's probably many ones out there that are going to work just as well. But stasher dot IO is personally what I use, and you can go ahead and pull it up, download for Mac. And then once you finish Download, it will then pop up like this. So we have here our Ssher so all we have to do is paste in a URL, and then hit Go, and then it will download for us. So I can just come up here, hit Command Copy. And then go back into Stasher, hit Paste, and then go. And then we just wait a few minutes for this to actually download. Okay, so there we go. We have it done now. And sometimes it can fail on its first attempt. And when that happens, all you have to do is just go ahead and paste back in the URL. No changes and just hit go, and it should never kind of it should never fail after a second attempt. So second attempt should be all you need. Now, these work in kind of a weird way and being able to download them. They don't always go to your finder at the top of your download section. So what I recommend you do is select this button when it's done downloading. So then it takes you directly in your finder where it is, and it'll highlight it for you. So now let's go ahead and go back into I Movie, and then we can input our footage. So I'm going to go ahead and zoom out here and then here off screen, I'm going to pull it in. So as you can see, it downloaded the full YouTube video with the footage attached to it, as well. Now, listening to it. Holy goes till I get up. I miss belly us. We see that the audio is here perfectly fine. But we don't want to have this video attached to it, as well. So like I showed you before in our audio section, all we have to do is select and click Detach audio. And then I can just go ahead and drag this down. Let's go ahead and get rid of this music. I can drag this down here and then put it here in our audio well. And then I can just go ahead and delete that, and let's go ahead and split it there and get rid of this excess audio, and I can turn it down a little. So there we go. And just a minute or two, we're able to add this piece of audio directly from YouTube into our project. And this is gonna be the same thing for whatever you're going to be using this for. This can be a background. This can be any sound effects. This can be a transition. All of it is super easy and it all works the same. 42. Master a Fun iMovie Feature - Trailers: Alright, so today we are going to be going over trailers within Eye Movie. Now, trailers are super fun because they offer us templates to make quite entertaining trailers. Alright, so let's go ahead and get right into this. So to access trailers within Eye Movie, what we have to do is make sure that project tab is selected, and then we are going to go over to create new. And instead of going into movie, as we have been throughout this entire course, we're going to select trailer. So here, we have all of the trailers within Eye Movie, and there's going to be 29 of them. So there's 29 trailers which are essentially templates to these kind of projects that we can create. So let's go ahead and look at these because with each one of these trailers, we are able to click this play button, and we can preview what it is. So let's go ahead and go with this retro one. So as you can see, each one of these trailers has its own intro logo. We saw that one had a little tree to it with our name. So we can see that one was a globe right there in the intro. There we see the globe again. And here we have a mountain. So, in each one of these, all of these intros are not going to be specific to each one of the trailers. There are going to be the one part of the trailer where we can actually go ahead and select any kind of intro with any other trailer. So what actually matters is going to be everything that comes after that. So let's go ahead and look at this sports one. So as we can see, in these trailers, there's going to be a couple of things that are going to be specific to it. So within a trailer, the template that it's going to be offering us is going to be segmented clips. So there is going to be a certain amount of time that each clip that we put in is going to be viewed is going to be on screen for. And then it's going to have specific transitions within the trailer. And it's going to have specific titles within the trailer. Now, the titles within each of these trailers, so all the text that is going to be here within these templates are going to be things that we can change. Now, everything else, not so much. So all the stock footage that we see within any given trailer preview is obviously not going to be something that we're going to have access to because we're going to be putting in our own footage. Now, Everything else here, what we see is time under each one of these, 1 minute and 3 seconds here, 54 seconds here, 1 minute and 4 seconds here. This is going to be the length of the trailers, and this is not going to be something that we can change at least within the normal trailer editing. Now, what we can do and what I'll show you later in this lesson is we can convert any one of these given trailers into a movie. So then we're going to have more creative and kind of editing control over each one of them. But in the kind of basic area where we are going to be editing these trailers, we are going to be very limited on what we can actually go ahead and edit, as I'll show you later in this lesson. But I do want that to be something that you keep in mind that if you want to have something that's a little longer, you want to show some more footage, then you should go ahead and pick a longer trailer duration here. So pick a trailer that has a longer duration, I should say. So pick one that has 1 minute and 19 seconds as opposed to one that is 40 something seconds. Now, the next and last thing to mention is going to be the cast members. So in each of these trailers, what it's going to kind of introduce in the beginning of each trailer is going to be the characters of your trailer. So as you can see here in this Adventure one, there's gonna be one cast member. So there's going to be one character that within this trailer, within this template, they have space for an introduction of this one given individual within the trailer. And here with this Blockbuster one, there's gonna be two to six. So you can introduce six characters here. And then with ones like this Bollywood one, you can put in any amount. It doesn't matter. Okay, but enough yapping. Let's actually go ahead and get into one of these trailers and see what we can do with them. Now, the one that I'm going to do is this one right here, this adventure one. So I'm making sure that it's selected, and then I'm just gonna click Create. Okay, now we are here within the trailer. And as you can see, we no longer have our timeline down here. Instead of our timeline, we have these three tabs that we can work within. We have the outline and we have the storyboard, and we have a shot list. So let's go ahead and look through all of these. So each one of these gives us a different aspect of the trailer to edit. So here we can see as we hover over these, we get to see each time this specific thing is going to show up on the screen. These ones right here, this outline. This is going to give main parts of it, like the name and date, cast, studio, and then the end credits. Now let's go ahead and move into Storyboard. Now, our storyboard is going to show us the progression. You can see as I drag along here, we get to see how these move. I can go ahead and click at any point and then hit space and then just like the timeline. This one, it gives us a kind of template as to what we should have at each part of this kind of pre made trailer. So we have right here, this first one it's saying to do a landscape. So this is to set the scene of where we are and where this adventure is going to take place. There's only one name for adventure, and that's going to introduce our first character, which is Jake Callahan. We're going to have two separate shots of Jake Callahan. And as you can see, all of these shots have a preset duration to them. So this first landscape one is 2.7 seconds, and I'm not able to edit this. I'm not able to edit any of these, nor can I take out any of these shots. So this 2.7 second clip is going to be the case. I'm going to have a 1 second clip here and another 0.71 to follow it. So as you can see, these ones are all kind of description. So we have medium, landscape, medium, wide angle, medium. So these are all kind of like suggestions that it's giving to us in this kind of template. So next, we have the shot list. So this one here is kind of breaking up the storyboard. Instead of having them in chronological order as they appear here in the storyboard, we're having them separated by the kinds of shots that they are. So we have three clips of Jake Callahan here, and then we're going to have five action clips. And then there's going to be two landscape clips, eight medium clips, and four wide clips. So this really is going to make it a little bit easier for you if you already have your clips and footage that separated in a way and organized in a way that's going to make them easy to just kind of drag and drop in here. Okay, but now it's time to actually get started in building this. So let me go ahead and drag in the footage that we are going to be using. And I actually just downloaded all of these from Pexels, and I'm also going to have them available in our resources. So you can follow along if you want. So first, let's go back to the outline and look at this. So this movie name, what I'm able to do here is, as I click on it, I'm able to edit the text that is within it. So we see how it's spread up into these three separate parts. So we see here this first one is Jake, and this is going to be corresponding to big letters right here. So it's very simple to see. This anda is also going to be small. So I can change this anda with whatever. I can say Jake from the as we can see, it's going to stay small. So I'm going to go ahead and undo this, keep it as the same. As you can see, it's super simple to edit from here, and then I can change the release date right here, but I'm going to keep this all the same. So we have our star. So just as it was before, we see that these are breaking up into two separate text boxes that are each going to be dedicated to a certain kind of textyle. So we see Jake here is going to be some small text, and then we see Callahan, the last name, going to be in big text. Then we're also able to change the gender here if we want. I'm going to keep it as a male. Now, our studio name, let's just go ahead and change that to citizen. So we now have our studio name here, Digital Skills Academy. And like I told you before, we're able to change this logo style. So as you can see here, this one is a basic one, which is just black. We don't want that. We want something a little cooler here. So we have a spinning globe right here. We also have sun rays through the clouds. I like that one quite a bit. We have the snowy mountain, that was the original one, a glowing pyramid, kind of like a spy S, signals across the globe, colored bars, Dandelion, Galaxy street lamp. And now we have lastly, but not least, we have trees. So, honestly, I'm going to just keep it with the tree. I like it. It's a little simple design, and we're going to go ahead and move into actually creating this trailer. So, for some reason, this one came here. And first thing I want to show you, I don't know how this popped up here, but for me to just get rid of this from this, all I have to do is click Delete. When I have this selected, I have all of these clips that I can work with. Now, because these are set durations, only 2.7 seconds to use here, what I'm able to do is simply drag over any pieces of my clips and we can see that it has a pre selected box. As you might have guessed, this box is 2.7 seconds. I can just go ahead and find whatever piece I want and then I can just click and then have it added in. I'm going to, let's go ahead and do this one for the landscape. And obviously, you don't actually have to make it what it's saying. Like, I don't have to make this a landscape shot. But these are kind of suggestions that it's giving to me. So the next thing that we can do when we have it added in here is make a couple adjustments. So first, we have audio. So if your videos do have some audio attached to them, then you could come over here and enable the audio or disable it. Default is disabled, and none of my clips have any audio to them, so it's not a problem. And like I showed you before, if we want to get rid of any clip, then we could click Delete, or alternatively, we can use this button right here, which removes the clip. Now, lastly, what we have is this little button here. Now, what this does is allows us to get a more precise selection of clips as we want from our original footage from our media library. So I like it how my selection was. So I'm not going to select anything different. But as you can see, you can just scroll across here. And then if you have a different selection that is going to be outlined by this yellow box, this yellow rectangle, then you could just select it, and then that's what you'll have. Okay. So now, you basically understand how to operate these trailers. So what I'm going to do now is go ahead and fill in the storyboard, and then I'm going to come back to you. So I'm going to go ahead and do this real quick. You already know how it's done, and I don't want to waste your time. And one nice thing to mention as you're going along picking clips from your media library is that as you're going, it's going to automatically scroll for you. So you can just go from shot to shot. I'm going to go ahead and select this one. Now it wants a landscape, so I'll go ahead and select this little bit. Then next, we have a medium shot, so I'll just go ahead and select this. And then we have a wide angle shot that it wants. I can go ahead and select this one, another medium, I can select this. As you saw, it just scrolled automatically. So it's super simple. It's super intuitive for you to just go ahead and click whatever from your media library and then just have this done very quickly as long as you have all the videos available to you. Okay, I've went ahead and added all of the clips that we're going to use here, and I've duplicated a couple of them because I didn't have enough, but we're going to go ahead and enlarge from the beginning. So there you have it. There's the full trailer that we just made in really just a few minutes. So as you can see, there's its own music associated with it. There's its own kind of title sequences that are associated with it. And all of these, we can't edit. That is, we can't edit in this layout that we have here as a trailer. But we can edit if we convert it to a movie. So that's what I want to show you how to do now. So there's two ways that we can do this. First, we can come up here into file and then click Convert trailer to movie, and alternatively, can move back and we can come here. And as we can see with this little icon that's right here, it's a trailer. As compared to this one, New York trip, which is a movie given by this film icon. So if we want to convert this to a movie, then like I showed you, we can do the file method, or we can come right here, click these three dots, and then click convert trailer to movie. So now, as you can see, we have now entered back into our familiar timeline. So here we have everything. We have our transitions. We have the music. We have our titles. So at this point, what I'm able to do is drag the title anywhere I want it. I'm going to go ahead and undo that. I can go and grab the audio and then change the audio, say if it's a little too loud, I can reduce it 50%. I want any of these clips to be longer than the preset duration of them, then what I can do is just grab them and extend them. So now I turn that 1 second clip into 6.7. Now, there's a reason why we have a certain set duration to each of these clips in the template form that it gave us. And that's because everything that's happening in this trailer is going to be associated with the audio track with it. So Apple put these all together to create a very cohesive trailer for each preset, each one of the 29. So they're supposed to align perfectly with the audio that they have. So they have this music that is very much kind of emphasizing the message that is trying to be delivered in all of these trailers. Here, we have an adventure trailer, so our music fittingly, is going to be very epic, and all of the moments of heavy bass or anytime that the music gets louder or quieter, it's all going to be like coordinated with these title sequences that we have. So really, if there's anything that you want to specifically show in this that you can't, and the small durations of 1.7 seconds or 2.3 seconds that we have in our templates, then you can convert it to a movie and extend them. But like I said, these were all created with this duration in mind and to be a coordinated with this music. So, for the most part, if you can and if you are using these trailers, then I would recommend that you don't kind of mess with it in this mode unless you want to add something that is kind of accompanying each one of these footage, but you're not messing with the timing of each of these transitions of the clips. So say you want to add some text here, or you want to add something else that is going to kind of help your movie and make it look a little better. Maybe you want to change the kind of transition that they have, which won't be affecting the moments that each of these are going to be transitioning into the next, which therefore won't affect the music. But there you have it. This was a complete run down on how we can use trailers in I Boof. 43. Another Fun iMovie Feature - Themes: In this lesson, we are going to go over something similar to trailers that is also an easy thing to incorporate into your projects to spice them up and give them a own kind of flare to them. And that is themes. So themes are accessed over here in our project settings. Right here, we have theme, right now, in this project, there's no theme selected. So let's go ahead and select this, and here we can preview all of the themes that Eye Movie has to offer for us. So each one of these, we are able to go ahead and click And we're able to preview each one of these. So we're able to see each one has an intro sequence. We see kind of transitions that happen. We saw that little title pop up. And each one will also have an endtitle to it. So we can look at each one of these and we can go ahead and select whichever one we want to use in our project. So for me, I'm going to go ahead and select this bulletin board to go ahead and get started in this. So, right now, I have the bulletin board selected. As you can see right here, the theme is bulletin board. So what I can do now is I can grab any piece of footage, and then I can drag it in. And as you can see, dragging this in immediately put on this kind of intro sequence right here. Now, I'm going to add a few more pieces of footage. Let's go ahead and do this one right here, and then I'm going to go ahead and zoom out for you to see. So right now, we have an intro sequence. And if we go here, we see a transition that has an end scene to it. So now what happens if I go ahead and add another one to the end of this? Well, as you can see, this end credit has now moved here. Okay, now, what if I do the same thing in the beginning, though, and I move this here to precede it? As you can see, the intro now stuck to this new piece of footage that I put in. And then each one of these, I'm going to go ahead and shorten this. Between each piece of footage, we have transitions. So these are quite similar to trailers, but you can see that they're much more adaptive and much more dynamic than trailers are in importing and in using your own footage, in your own project. Because every time that we add something here within our project, whatever is here with the theme shifts and it adjusts to the new footage that we're adding. So it makes everything just a little bit more easier when we are going to be adding and editing and changing what we are going to have in a project as compared to trailers. So let's go ahead and add a few more pieces of footage here, and we are going to take a look at how things are. So now I'm going to zoom out just a little bit, and we can watch through these. I'm going to go ahead and shorten the duration of these clips so we can move through them a little bit faster. But we see that there's a little fade in the intro, and then there's this intro sequence, right? And then we see there's an automatic transition that's added here. And then here we see a theme specific transition. Here, that one was just a cross dissolve, a simple one. And then here we see another theme specific transition. And then finally, we have a cross dissolve, which is all going to lead into our final end kind of sequence. Okay, so as we were looking through this, we saw a few theme specific transitions. We saw one right here, and we saw another one right here. So what if you want to kind of switch these up and you want to put more themed transitions in here as opposed to these cross dissolves? Well, if we move over to transitions, this is exactly what we have. We have specific themed transitions right here at the top of our transition tab. But one issue is that when we try to do this, right, I'm going to go drag and drop. As we can see, it's still a cross dissolve. And that's because when we have a theme selected, I Movie is going to want to format it in its own way. You know, we can go ahead and put in more pieces of footage, and it's going to adapt around the pieces of footage that we put in. But the changes that it makes are very specific, and therefore, we have to turn off a specific setting in order to be able to adjust it. So let's go over here into settings. Now, next to theme, right? We see bulletin board here. And right next to it, we have this automatic content. So this automatic content being checked on is what makes this theme be so dynamic. It's what makes whenever I add a piece of footage to an end, it's what makes it move the directed by to the end or the same thing in the beginning or even just adding these transitions. That's what the automatic content does. So if I were to switch this off, then I can go ahead and go back into transitions. And now, if I were to drag and drop this here above this transition, it then went from the cross dissolve to now this, now our theme specific transition. Now, if I were to go ahead and turn settings back on and turn on this automatic content, we see that this transition is still here. So this is a good thing. Now, if we go ahead and add another piece of footage, let's select only a few seconds of this and then drag it in. Let's see how it's going to react. We have this one here, which is a theme transition. We have this one here, which is a cross dissolve, and this one is still the transition that we had selected before. So if you turn off automatic content and then you go ahead and make some changes, then the changes that you made are, for the most part, going to stay the same when you turn back on automatic content. Now, transitions aren't the only thing that are going to be specific to these themes. We also have titles. So as you can see here, we have some credits, we have lower thirds. We have upper thirds. So these titles, we can just go ahead and drag and drop anywhere, and we can see as we play it, it's going to pop up. So here, for example, I could just put whoever's name is in the footage and then surfing. And then I can grab this title and drag it here. So let's go ahead and watch this. And then here I can put, let's say, the location. And you're able to adjust the duration of these freely as much as you want, no matter if you have automatic content on or off. And that's another great thing with the titles, because the titles, you don't have to go ahead and mess with the automatic content because if there's no titles present, then you're able to add as much as you want. Now, let's go ahead and see what happens if we change our theme. So I'm going to go ahead and come back here to the theme, and let's scroll down and say, use this travel theme, and I'm going to go ahead and click change. So now we have the change theme. So let's go ahead here to this beginning. And we can see. So as you can see, automatically, it not only changed the theme, but it also has some automatic content here in the date because it took the date of this footage when it was added to my computer and put it right here. March 2025 is the date associated with this piece of footage. Now, if we go through, we can also look at the end and we can see that this end credit is also changed to what this theme is. Now, what happens if we look in the middle at our titles? Well, our titles actually remain from our prior theme. This is because each title isn't going to kind of translate over specifically from theme to theme. So I'm going to do is get rid of these, and we can go ahead and look at these titles right here. So each kind of theme has its own amount of theme specific content associated with it. So as you can see here, with this theme, there's only one kind of title that is here. That is besides the opening and ending title, of course. So we only have one of these as opposed to the couple that we had with our prior theme. But now we don't want to just look at the titles here. We also want to look at the transitions. So let's go ahead and watch these transitions into play. So first, we have the ending of this. It zooms in, and then we're going to have a cross dissolve. Now the next one is going to be a theme specific one. So we have these postcard stuff falling over the screen. The next one is a cross dissolve. And then we're going to come into another theme specific transition. So let's go ahead and move into this transition here. And as we can see, with this theme, there's only one transition. So that was made apparent by the fact that it was a repeated transition from here to here. So as you can see, it follows a pattern for the most part. It's going to go from a cross dissolve into a theme specific transition. Then a cross dissolve, and then into another theme specific transition, if there is multiple, if there's only one, as there is in this one, then it's just going to repeat that same one every other transition. Okay, now you don't only have to do a theme from scratch. You can also apply a theme to a project that you're already working on. So let's go ahead and look at how we can do that. Okay, so right now, we're back here in our New York trip project. So from here, we just do the same thing as we did before, and we're going to come to theme. We can come here, and then we can select any one that we want. Let's go ahead and work with this film strip one. So I'm going to click Change. And as you can see, all these transitions were added. We're going to have an intro sequence now. And it moves right in. We have a film transition here. Now, this one doesn't work as well because I had this little subway kind of makeshift transition that I created myself. So it's not the smoothest here, but we can go ahead and continue watching the the risk. As you can see, we have another issue here with this transition that I imported uptop kind of battling with this eye movie transition. But this one is gonna be a good one. Yeah. And then we're going to also have another one. Okay. So we can see here that the cloud work and the transition works well with our themed transition. It doesn't make it kind of any worse in it. But as we can see, we have this end credit and we have this beginning credit. And what we're able to do within these themes, just as with any theme, we can go ahead and click this, double click it, and we can change the text to be whatever we want. Let's say, just New York. Now if we redo this, there we go. It's just New York. Now I can come over here into titles, and we can go ahead and put a title right here. So, let's say, I want to put in Central Park. Now, if we look back at this, and these themes are nice because they really do incorporate within our projects quite well. As you can see right here, this little piece of tape is a little bit of translucent, so we're able to still see the footage behind. This is the kind of thing that works super well because we're not able to do this kind of effect within eye movie with any of the tools that it gives us. And that's really the case with a lot of these transitions. Right? Because if I were to create this transition, I wouldn't be able to do this with the bare kind of materials and tools that Eye Movie gives me. I would have to go into a separate software to be able to create something that looks like this. So there you have it. There's your full rundown on themes. 44. Color Correct Your Videos to Fix Any Issues: In this lesson, I want to talk to you about color correction. So color correction and eye movie gives us a few options, and honestly, they're not the most intuitive. So, in here, in this left bar, we have a couple of things that we can adjust. First here in the middle, we have the brightness. So as you can see, every little thing that we hover over here gives us a little bit of a description about them. So and here we have first, the brightness. So if I switch this left to right, we get to see how that affects the image. And oftentimes, when you're going to be editing your footage here with this color correction tool, with an eye movie, you're not necessarily going to be looking for, you know, this specific thing that you can adjust. So you're maybe going to be looking for the brightness or contrast or the highlights here. You're really just going to be playing around with this if you don't necessarily know what each of them does. So that's honestly the approach that I would take when I'm first starting out. If you see that your footage is just a little bit off and you don't know exactly how to correct it, the best way I would say, just go ahead and move these around until you find a kind of balance that you think would fit well. But let's look at each of these specifically. I'm going to go ahead and reset it here. So with the brightness, it's very straightforward. We see here what it does in this image specifically, is if we reduce the brightness, then we can see the forefront of the image. So this dog in the sand becoming much darker. But we get to see a little bit more details in the background here. So if we increase the brightness, then we see that the background now is almost essentially white where we can't really see any details, and the dog and sand are much brighter. So I'm going to go ahead and reset it, and now here we have the contrast. So the contrast, if I were to make it lower, you don't really see much of a difference, much separation between the dog and the background or the sand. Now, if I increase it, we get to see this become much more polar. So we see this background here and the dog almost two opposite colors, with this being white and the dog being completely black here. So I can go ahead and bring it all the way down. We see that everything almost looks uniform, and here, it's the opposite where they are very distinct differences. And then last, we have the highlights. So again, I'm going to reset it and adjust this. So we can see after I cross this line right here, it becomes way more different than anything else. So if I am to decrease it below this line, we see a difference, but it's not that drastic as it is when we cross this line here. So again, here, this is going to be adjusting the highlights. So we see the main highlight here, which is going to be what is affected by this slider the most is going to be the sunlight. So if I decrease it, we see that mostly the background color, the background brightness is what's being affected here, and our dog, not so much. And as I increase this, we see the effect of the light and how it grows from the sun being more contained in about this area to then if I drag it out, we see now this sun essentially looks like it's this entire top right of the footage. So that's what the highlights do. Now we have down here, which is going to be the shadows. So the shadows, as you'd assume, if we increase it, it's basically going to take the blacks and the image and make them much more prominent. Now, if I were to do the opposite and bring it in, we see, especially if you're looking at the sand, we see these shadows, these kind of shading that's in the image, in this case, in the footage, it's being decreased. So now if we bring it back to the original you see it being much different. So if you want to have a kind of brighter image here, but the brightness here and adjusting the entire thing isn't to your liking, then you can go ahead and adjust the shadows. And personally, I like it better like this. Now, you might be wondering, why are we working within this project here with this film overlay? That's because personally in my projects, the time that I find myself going to color correction the most is if I want to kind of change the feeling of some piece of footage or an image. Now, this is going to be the case because here I have this overlay, which is kind of some old timey film overlay, right? So in order to kind of enhance this effect of having this old time footage overlay, what I want to do to this footage is to make it a little bit more black and white, to make it feel a little more grainy. Now, how can I do that? Well, right here in this second bar, we have the saturation. So if I were to slide this to the right, we see here that these colors become much more prominent and much more saturated. Now, if I were to drag it to the left, we see that the colors are more dulled, and they essentially, if you bring it all the way down, become black and white. So when you bring it to the right, all of the colors are enhanced. They're saturated. And if you bring it to the left, they're all dulled and essentially made into a black and white footage. So I want to do to kind of make this look more old timey, more vintage. I want to decrease the saturation just a tad biit. You know, I don't want to make it all black and white, but if that's effect that you want to go for, then you can easily do it with this effect. So I just go ahead and decrease it a slight amount to now make it a little bit more fitting. So now, looking at this, it looks much more like some vintage footage of a dog playing on a beach. Now, we're not done with them. We still have one more thing to look at here, and that's the temperature. So temperature works in two ways. To the left, you make your image a little bit more blue, right? We have our temperature. And temperature works in two colors, essentially. If you move it down to the left, it cools off your footage and brings out the blue in them. Now, if you bring it to the right, it warms up your footage and makes it more yellow. So essentially, those times in movie and film, when you would see that Mexico effect. So when things are being recorded in Mexico, you see that the footage is more yellowy. Now, essentially what that is is the temperature on all of those footage on all those clips are being turned up. Now, personally, I never find myself having to work too much with the temperature. The temperature I typically keep here in the middle, and the saturation is usually the kind of effect that I go to and work with the most. But as you saw, from a quick overview of this, but as you saw, just looking at this without having me go through it, it does look a little bit complicated, but I hope in this lesson I made it a lot more simple for you because at the end of the day, it's not the most intuitive when you're working with it. But as I just showed you, it's really not that complicated. And if you don't know exactly what you're doing, then you could just play around with it and see what you like. And if you mess anything up, then, you know, you have your Command Z to undo or you can just come back here and click Reset to bring everything back to normal. 45. Color Balance Essentials: Make Your Footage Look Right: This lesson, we're going to get into the last part of our color grading section. And this one is the last because it's going to be the one that you're probably going to use the least out of everything that I told you. Now, we're going to use color grading when we're looking at our footage, and for whatever reason, the colors just seem a little bit off. Now, for the most part, when this is the case, we are going to be using this color correction tool because it's super straightforward with what we are able to edit, and it's also super detailed and specific as to the things that we are changing within our footage. Now, sometimes there will come a place for using what we're going to talk about in this lesson. Which is color balancing. Now, I always think it's a good idea for when you're going to be using footage to go ahead and if you don't like how it looks, if you want to change the colors in it, to come over here into color balancing and then go ahead and select Auto. Now, sometimes this will do exactly what you want. And you won't really have to do much adjusting or tweaking of the footage any past this point. But other times, it's not going to be enough. So let's go ahead and look into these three settings here that we have within color balancing and how we can use them and the situations which they're most helpful to us. Now, first, we have match color. Now, match color, as I just selected, it allows us to then skip to a frame, basically any frame within our timeline. And we can go ahead and click, and then it's going to match the colors from whatever we click, whatever we use with this eyedropper to our original footage. Now, when do we want to use this? Let me go ahead and back out here and reset. So this is going to be most useful when you have two pieces of footage. Say, you have something that is recorded during the daytime, and then you for whatever reason, in this same video, you had to stop recording, and then you have to resume recording later in the day when there's a little bit less light or the colors just look a little bit different. Well, when this is the case, if we have these two footage, say, one here is from the daytime, and then the other one here is from the evening, then once you're in the evening clip, you can then come over and click Match Color and then come over to your daytime clip and then just select. And then the colors from the two will then match. So it's going to look like it's one continuous piece of footage. Okay, so that's match color. Next, we have white balance. So if for whatever reason you are working with footage and the white just looks a little bit off, that's when white balance comes into play. White balance comes into play when you are going to be using this and you're going to be selecting the whites in your footage to match the white color to what it's actually supposed to be. So right here, I would say this is the most white piece of, you know, color or whatever part in this piece of footage. So if I think the white is off, then I would go ahead and select this. And as you can see, the colors slightly shifted. So you can also use these to kind of click around, and you'll see the difference. It will be very drastic. But the purpose of this is if the white is off in your footage and you have a piece of white that you recorded that's within this footage that you know is true white, then you could go ahead and use this eyedropper, use this white balance tool and select that piece to then get something that is accurate in the color. So once you make an adjustment, if you want to save that adjustment, then you can go ahead and click this checkmark. And if not, you would click the X. Now, lastly, we have skin tone balance. Now, skin tone balance works similarly to white balance because with white balance, what we're doing is selecting a piece of our footage that is white, so it kind of evens out all the rest of the colors. Now, skin tone balance works similarly when you want to use it to correct the color in your video so that the skin tones look natural. So, especially if it's the case where you recorded something, and the lighting or camera settings makes your skin look orange, green or blue, which isn't natural to your actual skin tone, then you can go ahead and use the skin tone balance and select it, and it'll smooth everything out and make it look much better. Well, there you have it. Here is our last lesson in this color grading section in using color balance. 46. Create a Video With Me 1/2: Welcome to what's honestly the part of the course that I've been looking the most forward to. So as you probably already know by now, in this lesson, we're going to be working through creating the intro lesson to this course. Now, there's no point in waiting any longer. Let's actually go ahead and get into this. So starting here, there's going to be one thing that we have to do right off the bat. So let's go ahead and look at this. Now, it's one thing for me to simply tell you what you'll learn in this course, and it's a whole There's one thing that you're going to notices that this entire thing is green screen. Oh, now I'm going to have to get rid of this green screen. And to do so, I have this image right here that I created with Firefly. So Firefly, how we already went over, it's one of the AI image generators, and it's personally one of my favorites to use, if not my favorite. So let's go ahead and put this on top of this one right here to create it as an overlay. So we will now be able to then select this top image, this footage, come over here to overlay settings, and then select green blue screen, and bam. We have this taken off. So now it's you'll learn in this course. And it's a whole nother thing for me to show you, starting with the super cool transition. Okay. So, now that we have this done, Well, we can also see that the Ken Burns effect is on, so we're going to want to go ahead and deactivate this right here and just click Fit. Now, one thing that I do want to say before we go any further in this is if I'm going a little too fast, then you have the option to actually go ahead and slow down how I'm speaking. So I might have mentioned this earlier in the course, but right now, it's going to be at one X speed. And if you want to slow it down from going through things a little bit too fast, you can go ahead and put that at 0.75 or 0.5, whatever you want. Okay, now with that disclaimer out of the way, one thing that I'm going to have to do here. Super cool transition. If we just see right there is the first thing that I mention is this super cool transition. But I'm not able to put a transition on something that is overlaid. So what I have to do is actually export this entire thing. So now it becomes one video that I'm able to put a transition on. But given that I know what's coming ahead, what I want to do is actually trim this right here to not cover the entirety of it, because later I'm going to reference the green screen. Yep, right here. Me to put on some videos of some cute cats or dogs, if that's what your thing. I'm going to have to actually go ahead and do that myself and add different green screen. So I'm going to have to replace this with cats and dogs. So I'm just going to shorten this here, and then I can go ahead and go back and add this same image in. It's not going to be a problem. But also, what I do want to do at this point is because this is now when I export it, it's going to be exporting with a black background. I want to go ahead and trim this at this point and then add in the original footage again, so I have the green screen from it from the beginning. But actually, an easier way to do this is I can just go ahead and trim from this point, so I'll just split the clip. Now that that's trimmed, I can come here and I can see that this one is used up to this point. I just snap right in there, so I can just select I to then grab this piece right here. So let's make sure that that's a smooth cut. How you can upload that footage from your iPhone to I movie in just a couple clicks. But in just a couple clicks. But, as we can see, that was not a clear cut, so I'm just going to have to adjust this a little bit to make sure that it is such. It's now all good. But before we go ahead and export it, what I do want to do is add this background right here to after this part where I talk about the green screen just so I don't have to redo it there. Say use this green screen behind me to put on some videos of some cute cats or dogs, if that's what you. Movie even has smarter thing. Eye Movie even has maps to visualize your travel from Washington, DC in the US to London or from London to New Delhi. Or maybe you want to learn it all to New Delhi, or maybe you want to learn it all. In that case, you can watch me walk you through how this intro lesson was created from uploading the raw footage to the final finishing touches. And we'll go through countless other projects as we cover all of the features in Eye Movie. Now, all you have to do. Alright. So now I have this entire thing that is basically going to act as our a role for this entire video. So now I can go ahead and come up here and export this file. I'm going to go ahead and click Next and wait for it to export, and then I'll come back to you guys when that's done. Okay. Now one thing? So now we are here and good to go. So next thing that I actually want to show you is, in case you actually want to create background like this yourself and you were just following along with what I'm doing and you want to copy me, I'll show you the exact prompt that I use. It's actually right right in here. So I said, I need a stylish home office background suitable for a YouTube video because I felt like that was going to be the easiest thing to give this AI generator as an idea of the kind of background that I wanted. So, I said, this setting should look like a modern living room corner with ambient lighting, include wooden shelves and modern fixtures. The desk shut up should feature, a sleek, modern professional microphone and a keyboard, all under soft purple and blue LED mood lighting. And then here at the end, I have some extra stuff that I add. Add decorative elements, blah, blah. So, if you want this and whatever it was interesting to you, I just wanted to show you this real quickly. Now, let's go ahead and get back into the editing. So, the first thing that I mentioned here is tell you what you'll learn in this course, and it's a whole nother thing for me to show you, starting with the super cool transition. Okay, the super cool transition. So I'm going to go ahead and split this clip right around here. Starting with the super cool transition. Okay. Now, following this. We see I say that's not right. That's not right. It's because this transition is going to be my least favorite transition, the evil transition, kind of like how you're not supposed to do the forbidden guitar riff in some guitar stores. This is my forbidden transition, and it is going to be the page Crow. This is the only time you'll see me use this transition in this course. A whole nother thing for me to show you. Starting with the super cool transition. Okay, I'm going to go ahead and shift this transition a little bit more a little bit more ahead. So I'm going to come back to here. So yeah, let's make it like around let's try to make it around here. So split clip and now insert this transition. The super cool transition. See, that one was a little delayed. So we're gonna have to go back and make a new cut. Let's try here now. The thing for me to show you starting with the super cool transition. Okay, I'm going to back it up just a little bit more than I had it. Okay. Now let's try here. Sure. Honestly, we'll just keep it at that and move on. That's not right. All right. Okay. And then, that's not right. Now here, I'm celebrating that I'm gonna be using the correct transition. Now, for this point, what I want to use is the light leak transition that we went over earlier in the scores. So I'm going to go ahead and grab it and be right back. Okay. So I have now pasted it in. Can't really tell us it's super small, but I'm now zooming in, and we can go ahead and move it over to where it's supposed to be. Right here where I made this split is where I want it. So now let's go ahead and zoom out and look at it. Alright. Okay, so it's a little delayed right now, so I'm going to go ahead and put it back. Now let's look. That's not right. All right. Still a little delayed. Alright. That's better. Okay. Here, I want to put it just a tab bit more back. That's not right. All right. That's better. Okay. There we go. So now I'm moving else. What's next? I'll show you how to do that later on the course. Not in the beginning. That's funny. See? I said I was bringing this in earlier in the course, and now So later in the course. Do that later on the course. Not in the beginning, we're going to start with something simple, like how to cut. Okay. Here we go. We have another one that we're working with right here. So here I something simple. Like how to cut. Wait, let's fix that. Okay, here, I'm yet again doing another joke. Like how to cut. So what I want to do at this point is put a black screen to, you know, emphasize this joke right here. Let's go ahead and split the clip right here. And I actually even want to shorten it a little bit. So I want to cut myself saying the word cut in half. So let's look back simple. Like, how to cut. So yeah, I actually want to drag this back, like, the teensiest bit to cut myself. Like how to cut. Wait. Okay. Yeah, that's better. So now what I need to do here is I want to add in a black screen for just about a second to kind of just make this look like I just cut it off and there was a gap that it wasn't supposed to be there. So to do this black screen, I can just come to backgrounds right here and I can grab this black background, and I can paste it in between. And then I'm going to shorten it to let's say 1 second. Let's look at that. Simple? Like, how to cut. Wait, let's fix that. Okay. And now I'm gonna zoom in here, as we can see, there's this little part right here that was pulled in from the last pit, so I'm just going to drag it in a little bit. Okay. So now Wait, let's fix that. Like, how to cut? Wait. Okay. I think that's good. I could make it a little longer, but, hey, we live in a attention economy. I don't want to have this distracting for too long. So let's move on. Wait, let's fix that. Now in the beginning, we're going to start off simple with how to cut footage. Okay. So now we are good. Here, what I want to do with how to cut footage. Okay, how to cut footage. Here, what I want to do is actually zoom in a little bit to how to cut footage. I'm looking around to kind of, like, emphasize that, like, this was a joke, to give it, like, you know, a little bit deeper of a layer. So let me go ahead and see where I should cut it. How to cut footage. Yeah. So right about when I move my eyes, I want to have that to be zoomed in. So to do so, I'm going to split this clip here, and then Okay. And then I'm going to split it right here, as well. So now I have this clip. So I can come here into cropping. I can crop to fill, and let's do it like this. No, it's like how it works. We're gonna start off simple with how to cut footage. Okay. Follow that. Yeah, I like that. So moving on. Following that, you'll learn how to add some emotional depth to your projects with music and sound effects. Do you want to create something with a more somber tone? Something more? Okay. So here we are now going to be working with the sound. To your projects music and sound effects. I'm going to go ahead and start right here at the beginning of this. And I'm gonna split the clip. I don't really need to, but I'm doing this mainly as a marker for myself. Again, I could also use the Mk to actually place a marker, but I'm just going to split it for now. Do you want to create something with a more somber tone? And then I'll split again right here. Beat happy. Oh, wait. Something what? Yeah, that's fine. Beat happy or even. And then, again, I'll split here. Happy or even a little mysterious. Okay. And again, I am going to split here at this point. So now we have three clips. We have a somber tone. Something with a more somber tone. We have something upbeat and we have something mysterious. So my first step in doing this is I want to go ahead and look through the audio and video that we have right here, this audio and video tab to see if they have any good, like, kind of songs here that are going to be fitting any of these moods. So I'm just going to go ahead myself and not waste your time and listen through these. And if I find one, I'll tell you. Okay, so right here, we have this music. And I think this one would work pretty well with our mysterious tone. So I can go ahead and select a range here so I don't drag this entire two minute clip in. I'm going to set that as the outpoint, and I'm going to drag this in here. So let's listen to this. Okay. So this is super quick. This is only 2.6 seconds. So I really have to go through and choose what part of this is going to work the best. Looks like this. In just a few minutes. Looks like this. In just a few minutes. I think I'm going to go ahead and select this little bit right here. So I can go ahead and line this up with the end, and then I can split the clip here and delete this excess. Now, I'm going to add a little bit of a fade here, so it's not very abrupt. And then I'm also going to turn down the volume because it is quite loud. So let's listen. Or even a little mysterious. And I'm also going to add a fade to the end of this. Or even a little mysterious. Colors change? Okay. Now, working ahead a little bit, I do say here. See how the colors changed? You'll learn that, too. See how the colors change. So I'm going to go ahead and make this one black and white. So I can do that by coming over to the color balancing, right here, and I can just decrease the saturation decrease the saturation to be, let's just make it fully black and white. Or even a little mysterious. See how the colors changed? You'll learn that, too. So this is also another part of audio design that I do want to mention. It might be something that's a little bit beyond this course, but it kind of applies to comedic timing and just making your videos and adding, you know, that bit of comedy to them. And that's kind of what I did here in both the scripting and the editing. So if we see how this piece right here mysterious. How the colors changed? We go to a mysterious thing, even though, you know, I am joking. A little mysterious. And we go to me being, like, upbeat smiling, with a cheeky little smile saying, see how the colors change, referring to what happened to before. Plus, we have the audio effects, the sound completely cut a little mysterious. See how the colors change? Even a little mysterious. This cut that I did with the sound and how it goes from, you know, this whatever, mysterious music into me being, you know, completely upbeat and smiley is a kind of way that we can use sound design to help in our editing if we're going to be doing any kind of comedy or, you know, light hearted parts that we want people to laugh at. These abrupt end in music can really help emphasize whatever joke that we have on the screen. Now I'm going to go ahead and go back and listen to more music so we can get some somber and some happy music. Okay, I think this piano ballard can work quite well for our sad part. So I'm just gonna select this tiny part right here and bring it in. I want to cut off this loud part, for sure. And let's see other sounds. Sound effects. Do you want to agree something with your somber tone? Something? Yeah. I think that works well. Now I just have to line this up here and decrease the music volume. Sound effects. Do you want to create something? And I'm also going to add a fade to make the start of it a little bit less abrupti. Do you want to create something with more sombre tone? Something what? Okay. Now I need to go ahead and get the upbeat part. Honestly, this next this next sound right here, this fifth Avenue stroll I think, works quite well. You know, it is quite upbeat. So I'm gonna go ahead and select a little part of this and drag it in. For now, I'm going to put it on the bottom music layer, and then I'm going to drag it back up because we're gonna have some music on the bottom later. Something more upbeat and happy or even Okay, I like this one, personally. So let's listen to this entire section before we're gonna move on. Do you want to create something with a more sombre tone? Something more upbeat and happy or even a little mysterious? See how the colors changed? You'll learn that, too. Okay. I think this section is pretty good. It's time to move on. Now, maybe you're dealing with footage from your iPhone that looks like this. In just a few minutes, Okay, let's listen to the rest of this. In just a few minutes, we'll take it from this to this. Wonder how I put myself. And I'll also Okay. So now I have to pull in some shaky video that we are going to then stabilize. I already have it right here. Maybe you're dealing with footage from your iPhone that looks like this. In just a few minutes, we'll take it from this to this. Wonder how I put? Okay. So show you how you So let's go ahead and what we want to do is split this where I say from this to this. So we'll take it from this this. So, I say that right about here, so I'll select this and then split it. And then where do I want this to end? Wonder how I put myself up here? Yeah, right here. You guessed it? There's a Okay, so now what I have to do is select this one and then come up here to video stabilization and check this box. And what I want to do is increase the stabilization a little bit. So let's see how this looks. In just a few minutes, we'll take it from this to this. Wonder how I put myself up here? Okay, I think that's pretty decent. So now what I have to do is I have to overlay myself on top of this footage because I say, wonder how I put myself up here? So I need to go ahead and do a picture in picture mode, and I can place myself right up here, and let's make myself about that size. So now let's look at it. From your iPhone that looks like this. In just a few minutes, we'll take it from this to this. Wonder how I put myself out keep? 47. Create a Video With Me 2/2: Okay, right now, what I want to do here is get rid of this fade. In just a few minutes. I think this is pretty good. I'll take it from this to this. Wonder how I put myself up here? You guessed it? There's a lesson on that, too. Okay, so my comments on this section right here is, I probably want to get some kind of video that has a more distinct shake in the beginning to have this contrast when I do stabilize the video to show something that's going to be a little bit more, you know, drastic of a difference. But Just a few minutes. For now, for now, we're going to keep it as such because I just wanted to show you exactly, you know, how I would be doing this in the video. We're going to have this part right here, which if it's this video or some other video, where it's going to be shaky, and then we have a cut here, and then we're going to be stabilizing this video all with me being in picture and picture mode on the top. But now I think it's good for us to move on to the next section. So is there's a lesson on that, too. And I'll also show you how you can upload that footage from your and also what I want to do here is I want to find the cut point, and I think I want to zoom into myself, especially with the next frame being something that there's not going to be any edits to. So I'm going to come here to crop and then I can come a crop to fill, and then just like this, now it's under how I put myself up here? You guessed it. There's a lesson on that, too. And I'll also show you how you can I think that's pretty good. So now let's move on. I'll also show you how you can upload that footage from your iPhone to i movie in just a couple clicks. But what if you just want to have some fun and say, use this green screen behind me to put on some videos of some cute cats or dogs, that's more. Okay. So as we can see here, we have a green screen, and what I say is that we're going to have some videos of some cute cats or dogs. So that's what I need to have behind me. But also, right here, I look off the main camera, and that's because I've recorded a video, another one on my phone that I'm going to put in here to show the green screen. Because all of this in my Arol this main piece of footage, I want to have something going on behind me. I don't want to have the green screen in this view at any point. So right here, I'm talking like normal. So I want to do is I want to add this background that we normally have to this part until I look off, and that's when I'm going to have my other piece of footage here from my iPhone that I recorded. So right now, what we have to do is go ahead and add this background. So I'm going to drag this in. I'm going to overlay myself on top, and let's drag it in. Now I'm just gonna go ahead and get rid of the green screen. Now let's rewatch this. But what if you just want to have some fun and say, use this green? Okay. So now I just got to get rid of the Ken Burns effect and say, use this green screen behind me to put on. Okay. Now what I'm going to do is overlay this piece of footage right here to this. And what I have to do is find the audio waves and make sure that they line up. Alternatively, I could just listen back through it to then find the point that I need. It's gonna be right about here where I look away. So I'm going to go ahead and split this clip, and we're gonna try to line it up just by listening to green screen behind to put on some video. So we can see it's a little off there. So we're gonna have to pull this back. This green screen behind This green screen behind me to put on. We're almost there. This green screen behind me to put on some videos of some cute cat. So now we see that the audio is all lined up. So what I want to do here is first, I want to decide how long I want to have this overlaid. So let's go ahead and listen videos of cute to put on some videos put on some videos of some cute. Okay. So I think I want to have it at maximum, we'll say this length, right? And obviously, I don't want to have this looking like this. So what I have to do is come here, come into the crop to fill, and then pull it into let's say that. So now let's look at it in the beginning. But what if you just want to have some fun and say, use this green screen behind me to put on some videos of some cute cats or dog. Okay. Now what I have to do is mute this section so we don't have two audio list. There's a green screen behind me to put on some videos of some cute cat. Okay, perfect. Now, for this next part, I'm going to have a little graphic behind me of a cat here and a dog. So I actually already did this in our split screen lesson. So I'm gonna go ahead and go grab that and pull it in here, and then I'll go over a quick walk through about how I did it. Okay. So there we go. I have now pulled it in. So let's look at this right now without it being lined up to anything. All right. So now let's go ahead and drag this piece of footage and put it on top. Okay? Luckily, these are the exact same length already, so let me just go ahead and get rid of the screen screen, and let's see how it looks. Of some cute cats or dogs, that's what your thing. V. Okay. I think that works pretty well as it is. So let's just go ahead and watch this entire si. What if you just want to have some fun and say, use this green screen behind me to put on some videos of some cute cats or dogs, if that's what you think. I move even has. Okay. So I think this is good. Now, this one here, as I said, I went over this on how to create this in a split screen lesson. So the reason I have this one consolidated into one clip as opposed to three is because to be able to do something like this, using three pieces of footage with this one right here of me, and then the two separate ones of the cat and the dog, I would need to have three layers. But I movie, we only have two layers to work with. So what I had to do is something like this. Let's go ahead and zoom out here. I'm going to pull the video of the dog there and the cat right before it. So I'm going to go ahead and split this clip right about here, and then I'm going to go and pull this dog over. And I'll do the same in splitting the dog clip, as well. Okay, so right now we see these are two overlaid pieces of footage. We don't see the cat. So to be able to see the cat, I'm going to go over here to the overlay, and then I'm going to do split screen. I'm going to change the position to right here. And then if we're looking at this right now, this is what we have. So we want to do two things to make it look like or docs. That's did here. So to do that, what I have to do is first, I want to fix the framing of this cat, because we see it's kind of pushed off to the left side of the screen, and it's not very centered as we see it right here. So to do that, that's pretty simple. We just come here, come to crop, and then we're going to crop to fill, and we're going to make sure that this little cross here right now is going to be centered on the cat. So right now it is now let's go back. See, this looks much better. I'm gonna command Z to undo what I did, and we can see the difference here. It looks much better like this. Now, the last part was the slide. So to do that, we're back here in our overlay settings, and then we can just put this little bar up to whatever we needed it to be. So, there we go. That's how we made it as such. So as you can see here, I'm going to go ahead and join these two clips because there's a split. Let's zoom it. We see that there's the turtle on this. So this turtle is because there's a speed editor that I added to this to make sure that it's the same length as this. So instead of having to redo the video and create it to where this split would happen at the perfect time, and then it would also end at the perfect time. Instead of having to redo that entire thing, all I had to do was change the speed of this to make sure that it's the right length. So if I want to, I can grab this and make this shorter. So then look at it. Or Docs. I'm moving. But no, we want it to be this length to fit the entire thing. Or. It's slowed down a little bit, but this is kind of just, like, a little workaround to make our lives much easier. But I think this section is now pretty good. And you know how to create that. So, let's go ahead and move on to the next section. Now, let's listen to this. I movie even has maps to visualize your travel from Washington, DC in the US to London or from London to New Delhi. Okay. So here, I'm looking off the screen in the beginning because I'm just reading straight from the script that I had because I knew at this point I was going to have maps overlaid. So it wasn't going to be me. I wasn't going to be seen in this. So just to make my life a little bit easier, I could read straight off of my script. So now, the first thing that I say is we can use maps to visualize our travel from Washington, DC to London. So to now visualize this, what I'm going to do is grab these globes. So let's go ahead and use this blue marble one. So, I said, from Washington DC Right here, two London. Okay. So now let's see how this lines up without doing. My movie even has maps to visualize your travel from Washington, DC in the US to London. Okay, so as we see, we have to make this longer. Eye Movie even has maps to visualize your travel from Washington, DC in the US to London or from London to New Delhi. Okay, I think that's fine. So what I'm gonna do is now grab a different globe to just change it up to then do that next section of London to New Delhi. Okay, so let's go ahead and select this. We're gonna do London first. We're gonna do London first, and then we're going to put in New Delhi. Okay, so now let's look at how this. The movie even has maps to visualize your travel from Washington DC in the US, to London or from London to New Delhi. Or maybe. Okay. So, I need to shorten this by quite a bit. Let's take it to about that. It has maps to visualize your travel from Washington DC in the US, to London or from London to New Delhi. Or maybe you just want to learn it all. Okay. That's quite perfect, in my opinion. So now what I want to do is I'm gonna go ahead and join these two clips here so we don't have that unnecessary cut. And what I want to do is add another zoom here. So, I want to make sure that it's learn it all. And that it. Okay. Now what I'm going to do is here, crop to fill, and again, we're gonna add another zoom. Alright. Now let's check this out from the beginning. Eye movie even has maps to visualize your travel from Washington, DC in the US to London or from London to New Delhi. Or maybe you just want to learn it all. In that case, you can watch me walk you through how this intro lesson was created from uploading the raw footage to the final touches. We'll go through countless other projects as we cover all of the features in I movie. Now, all you have to do is take the next step and start the course. I'm waiting for you on them. Alright, now I'm going to add probably one more cut right here to then do another Zoom. And editing Zooms should really be your best friend. We don't want to overdo them, but there's something that's super easy to do that can just add some little bit of visual discontinuity to kind of jolt the viewer and give them something that's a little different to just keep their attention. And they're just really super easy to do when compared to other kind of graphics that you can make or whatever. Zooms are just great. Take the Next sts and start the course. I'm waiting for you on the inside. Honestly, there, I'm gonna get rid of the Zoom. I think it looks better without it. Okay, so now let's take a look from the beginning. 1 minute and 37 seconds. Let's go ahead and see if we find any other things that we want to kind of tweak or adjust. Now, it's one thing for me to simply tell you what you'll learn in this course, and it's a whole nother thing for me to show you, starting with the super cool transition. That's not right. Well, well, right there, for some reason, we didn't see the transition. Let's go. The super cool transition. Okay. That looks. That's not right. Alright. That's better. I'll show you how to do that later in the course. Now in the beginning, we're gonna start with something simple like how to cut. Wait, let's fix that. Now in the beginning, we're gonna start I honestly, I think I want to make this just a tad bit longer. Let's do it like this. In the beginning, we're going to start with something simple like how to cut. Wait, let's fix that. Now in the beginning, we're going to start off simple with how to cut footage. Okay. Following that, you'll learn how to add some emotional depth to your projects with music and sound effects. Do you want to create something with a more somber tone? Something upbeat and happy or even a little mysterious. See how the colors changed? You'll learn that, too. Now, Now, here, maybe I want to add a Zoom. So let's go ahead and test this out. Okay, now let's look at it. Been a little mysterious. See how the colors changed? You'll learn that, too. Now, maybe you're dealing with Yeah, I think that's much better. Footage from your iPhone that looks like this. In just a few minutes, we'll take it from this to this. Wonder how I put myself up here? You guessed it. There's a lesson on that, too. And I'll also show you how you can upload that footage from your iPhone. Okay. Now here here I'm thinking of maybe changing uh, changing my, like, location on the screen when I say wonder how I put myself up here, because I think it's a little odd. Wonder how I put myself? I think it's a little odd how it goes up here. Especially when your main thing to look at here is gonna be this video. And then that comment kind of draws the attention to me. So with that to accompany it, I think I also want to change my position on the screen to maybe be a little bit more central. And I also want to stay in the picture and picture because I do say, like, wonder how I put myself up here. So I can't just make myself full screen. So let's find this slit. To this. Wonder. Okay. It is right here. So let's split this clip, and then I'm going to grab here. My picture in picture mode, and then I'll put myself, like, central. Let's say ways. In just a few minutes, we'll take it from this to this. Wonder how I put myself up here. Okay. Um let's see. Maybe I make this little smaller. And then when I come in, I'm gonna be a little bigger. In just a few minutes, we'll take it from this to this. Wonder how Yeah, and really there's not that much of a difference between the stabilization. One from this first one to the second one. From this, I took it. To this. Wonder how I put myself up here? You guessed it? There's a lesson on that, too. Yeah, I think the change I think my changing a position is a little better here. Okay, let's move on. You guessed it. There's a lesson on that, too. And I'll also show you how you can upload that footage from your iPhone to imvie in just a couple clicks. But what if you just want to have some fun and say, use this green screen behind me to put on some videos of some cute cats or dogs, if that's what you think. Movie even has maps to visualize your travel from Washington, DC in the US to London or from London to New Delhi. Or maybe you just want to learn it all. In that case, you can watch me walk you through how this intro lesson was created from uploading the raw footage to the final finishing touches. And we'll go through countless other projects as we cover all of the features in I movie. Now, all you have to do is take the next step and start the course. I'm waiting for you on the inside. Okay. I think this is I think this is pretty good. I want to extend this end just a tad bit because it's like, I cut off my symptoms. I'm waiting for you on the inside. And a little longer. I'm waiting for you on the inside. Okay. Yeah. So I think for the most part now, we have a quite cohesive intro lesson. We've done, like, essentially everything. I might still go back and do some little tweaks, so it might be a little different than the intro lesson that you see. But for the most part, we've done everything, and this didn't take that long. And on first glance, looking at this That's a thing for me. This doesn't look like a typical a typical eye movie project. We have a lot of elements that make it look more advanced than that, and it was super simple. It didn't take that long. Now, my next steps in editing this would probably be some super simple stuff that I wouldn't necessarily have to go over with you guys because you would already understand it. And that's going to be probably swapping out this video to get something a little bit more shaky. And then I'll probably also add some music. And then I might add some example footage, like when I'm talking about uploading stuff, or at the end of this lesson, when I'm saying from uploading the footage to the final finishing touches, I might add something there, too, as well. But yeah, for the most part, this is it. We have completed our intro lesson. 48. Create a Star Wars-Style Animation: Now, I know I say this a lot, but I really do mean it when I say, this one is going to be a pretty fun lesson, as you can see by the title. In this lesson, we are going to be making that iconic Star Wars intro from a galaxy far, far away. Now, eye Movie makes this relatively easy for us. So, if this is something that you wanted to create for whatever reason it may be, we're able to do this quite easily, and we're going to be able to edit the text to put whatever we want on this. So let's go ahead and get right into this. So we're going to go ahead and create a new movie, and we are going to go with our first step of choosing our background. Now, luckily, we don't have to go outside of eye movie to do this. We have right here the stars background. So this one is going to be the perfect setup for us and our intro. Now the next step of this is going to be getting that yellow text that's tilted a little bit to be big here at the bottom and to be small at the top. Now, again, I movie makes this super easy for us. So let's go ahead and move into titles. And if we scroll down, we have the exact one that we need right here. It's scrolling away from us. And right now, I'm going to go ahead and make this a little bit longer to span this 10 seconds. So as we can see, we now have the complete kind of template to create this intro. Now, one thing I do want to show you here is that we can look at the speed of this text moving right now. So if we want to make this go slower or faster, this is going to depend on two things. First, it's going to depend on the duration of the text, meaning how long is this bar right here. So if I go ahead and shorten this to say 3 seconds, we can go and hit Play. We can see how fast this moves. Now, if I go ahead and extend it to, let's say, 20, we can go ahead and move to the start here. And now we can see that it's moving at a much slower pace. Now, I said that this was the first thing that we're going to have to look at. Now, the second one that is going to dictate how fast this moves is going to be the length of the text that we're working with. So right now, basically what's happening is in this ten second clip, as we can see right here, what it's kind of communicating within our project is that within 10 seconds, we have to get from the first frame of showing nothing on the screen because it moves in from the bottom. So from this first frame of showing nothing to the end of this fade out of the text. So obviously, if we were to have less text, then this is going to move faster because in this ten second clip, it's going to have to make its way and do everything it needs to do within 10 seconds. So let's go ahead and put this example. Right now, let's go look at this right now first without touching anything. So we have a good idea about the speed of this. Now, if I were to click this title and now double click here, I can now adjust the length here. So let's go ahead and just hold delete for a little bit, and then I'm going to get it to about half the length. And then we can see how fast it moves. Now let's take a look at this with the shortened text. So what it's supposed to happen and as we see happening, it's moving a little bit slower than it was last time, because right now, what it has to do is make this shorter text span across this 10 seconds. So to do that, it has to move a little bit slower. Now, that was just to kind of let you know how this all is working and how it's all going to be coming together. But let's actually go ahead and put in the text to make this the proper far, far away intro. So I just went ahead and added the first piece of text a long time ago in the galaxy far, far away. Now, this doesn't look exactly how it looked in Star Wars. So how do we change this? Well, first off, these were all justified to fit the entire length of the screen. So I want to make sure that these are all lined now there's two ways that I can do this. Either I can change the font size on each one of these to make them fit, or I can change the justification up here to make them span across the whole thing. Now, what I'm going to go ahead and do is change the font size. So I'm going to start off with a smaller font here. Right now it's 159. So let's say we're going to reduce it to 129, and then I can go ahead and select this one, and it's 159, so I want to increase it to let's say 190, okay? And then I want this one to fit right below it. So I'm gonna have to make this even bigger than the last one, so I'll put 210. And while I'm at it, I'm going to decrease this one to, let's say, 180. Now let's try 17170? That fits a little bit better. Now, this one, it didn't change last time, so let's try it now. 150. Let's do 155 on this top one. Yeah. And then I'll make this one a little bit bigger. Let's say 220. And we can go even bigger than that. Let's say 240. There we go. Now let's look at how it looks. Okay, that's a little bit better. Now, the next thing that I want to do is add a little bit more space between the intro and the first part of the text that follows. So what I can do is come here and I can just hit Enter, Enter, Enter, Enter. So just adding some space in there, and now let's look at it. I probably want it a little bit sooner to start. So let's go ahead and come down here and I can get rid of two spaces. Now let's check it out. Yeah, I think that looks a little bit better. Now, instead of going and typing out this entire text, we're going to use our imagination to imagine it saying what it did in Star Wars. But even if we do that, we still don't have something. And what that something is is going to be music. Now, the music that comes here is arguably one of the most iconic tracks ever. Once you hear that, you know that it's Star Wars. So I'm going to go ahead and drag it in so we can use it. Now, unfortunately, we don't have access to the Star Wars song here in our audio section. So what are we going to do with that? Well, as I showed you earlier in this course, one of our biggest assets is YouTube and video editing. Because we can find almost anything in YouTube. And now that I don't have the Star Wars theme song here, where can I find it? Well, I just went over to YouTube and it was right there. So after typing in Star Wars main theme, we have it right here. So just like I showed you earlier in this course, what we can do is grab the link and then come down here and open up a YouTube downloader. And my example, I showed you Ssher. So I'm just waiting for Ssher to open, and then what we're going to do is take this link put it into Stasher, and then it's going to download, and it's going to give us this entire YouTube video. Okay, so we have opened here, and I can just paste this in, hit Enter, and then wait a couple minutes, and then it's going to download for us. So now we have it downloaded. As you can see, the first one was an error. So all I had to do was just paste in the same link again and then hit G, and it worked the second time. So sometimes it can be a little faulty, but it should never take more than a second chance to actually get this right. So now I can go back into I Movie and then drag in this music. So I have the file right here, and as we can see, it downloaded with the footage attached as well. And we don't want this because we already have our entire sequence right here. So all we want from this is the audio. So how do we detach the audio? Well, we already went over this. All we have to do is right click it and then click Detach Audio. So now the audio is separate from the footage, and I can just go ahead and drag this piece of audio here and I can hit Delete to this. Okay. So now let's go ahead and take a listen at how this is. All right. So we have this beginning sequence here. So what I want to do is delay the start of the music to, let's say, about here. So I can click M here to place a marker, and then I can grab this and line it up right here. Because in Star Wars, it doesn't actually start immediately. There is a little bit of a delay. Another adjustment that I also want to make here is to make this all just a little bit longer because I want to slow down the intro sequence to make it, you know, to make it a little bit more accurate. So now, along with this, something that I just noticed is that because I delayed this, I'm also going to have to delay the start of the music. Let's say now it's going to be around here. So I'll place another marker and then drag this over. So now let's go ahead and check this out. So, there we go. This is a pretty actual Star Wars Intro Star Wars Intro crawl, if you ask me. Now, this is a little crazy loud, so I'm gonna go ahead and decrease the volume here, and we can play this again. So, there you have it. This was super simple to do, and it's honestly a really fun thing to add to any one of your projects. If you're doing anything, it doesn't have to be Star Wars related, you could put this in, and people are instantly going to recognize it, and it could even be a little aspect of comedy, something for people to laugh at in your projects. So, wherever you want, this is a good thing that you can add in. And as I showed you, it's super easy to do. 49. Export Your Project the Proper Way: Now it's time to take you through a quite simple yet very necessary part of our e movie journey, and that's going to be exporting our project. Now, once we have a project that's all put together that we love, what we're going to have to do to actually be able to enjoy it outside of EMV is going to be exporting it as its own file. So the way that we're going to do this is come up here into this export button right here. We'll just click it, and then we have a few different options, but for the most part, you're going to want to just use this Export file button. This social platform essentially does the exact same thing as export file. You could export it and share it via email. So this will be essentially the project put into a file in an email associated with your account, whatever email you have logged in. And our last option here is to save the current frame as a photo. So if you have any frame that you want kind of as its own standalone photo, then you can come up here. And do it from here and click Save Current frame. But in this lesson, we are going to be focusing on this Fort file. So let's go ahead and select this. And from here in this Export window, what we're able to do is skim over this and preview our entire project to make sure that it's to our liking and there's no issues. Now, the next thing that we can do is we can change the file title, so you can make it whatever you want here. Me, I'm just going to keep it as New York drip. You can change the description, which isn't as important, but if you want to do this, then you can. There's a tag which you're also able to edit, and then comes into our first thing that is going to have some kind of weight to what we're going to be exporting here, and that's going to be our format. So we want to make sure that if we are doing an entire video, an entire project, we want to make sure that in this format, we have selected video and audio. Now, if you're doing something where the audio is the only thing that matters, then you could go ahead and select audio only. Now, next, we have resolution. So resolution, for the most part, you're always going to want to have it selected at the best resolution possible, ten ADP. It's not going to increase your file size like crazy and whatever kind of benefits that come from it being a ten ADP as opposed to 720 P or 540 P, it's going to be worth it because we want to have the best kind of quality and everything that's most similar to how we see it here in our preview window. So make sure that you have that ten ADP selected. Next, we have our quality. So the quality is going to be the same thing in the resolution. Here, I would also recommend that you always have it on high. Now, you could go ahead and do best with PRs. Right here, let's see how this changes. Right here, we have an estimated file size, right now, everything as is, it's going to be 76.5 megabytes is what I Movie estimates this file size to be. And then right here next to this, this 30 seconds is how long it estimates it's going to take for it to export. Now, if I'm over to come over here and choose best, we see how this shot up but extremely significantly. So for the most part, depending on what you're going to be using this for, what you're going to be using the project that you're creating, your movie, high quality is going to be probably sufficient. If you're doing some crazy edits where you need every single pixel to be picture perfect, then you could go ahead and select Best here with PRs quality. But if you're going to be looking at this on your phone or even your computer, you're not really going to see a difference between a high quality and a PRs quality. Now, lastly, we have the Compress. So for Compress, this can be whatever you want it. We have it as faster or we can have it as better quality. I tend to have mine always selected at better quality, just to have the kind of best project, best movie exported as possible. And this doesn't affect the file size or how long it's going to take. So personally, I would keep it at better quality. Now, from this point, all we have to do is click Next. Then we're going to name it. Click Save, and then the export process begins. And as you can see, up here in the top right, we have the export progress, and once it's done, we can go ahead and access it. You can see as I clicked on it there, we were able to see a little bit more information about it as well. So the estimated time it was going to take and the name of the file. So now let's go ahead and look at our exported trip. So here we go. It's 30 seconds. I can cook clay. And I always recommend you to kind of review the footage that you export once you do, because you want to make sure that there was no issues in exporting because sometimes there can be small bugs here and there, and you want to always mitigate those as much as possible. Especially when you're exporting something as short as 30 seconds. It's super easy for you to just go ahead and review it, and you can appreciate your work while you're at it. So, here we go. That was the entire project. And I don't know about you guys, but I personally love it. So, there you go. That's how you export your footage.